2009 Saturn VUE Green Line Hybrid Owner Manual M

Seats and RestraintSystem ............................... 1-1

Head Restraints .............. 1-2Front Seats .................... 1-3Rear Seats .................... 1-9Safety Belts .................. 1-10Child Restraints ............. 1-22Airbag System .............. 1-41Restraint System

Check ...................... 1-56

Features and Controls ...... 2-1Keys ............................. 2-2Doors and Locks ............ 2-6Windows ........................ 2-9Theft-Deterrent

Systems ................... 2-10Starting and Operating

Your Vehicle ............. 2-14Mirrors ......................... 2-27OnStar® System ............ 2-29Universal Home Remote

System ..................... 2-32Storage Areas ............... 2-37

Instrument Panel ............... 3-1Instrument Panel

Overview .................... 3-4Climate Controls ............ 3-17Warning Lights, Gages,

and Indicators ............ 3-22Driver Information

Center (DIC) ............. 3-36Audio System(s) ............ 3-56

Driving Your Vehicle ......... 4-1Your Driving, the Road,

and the Vehicle ........... 4-1Towing ........................ 4-22

Service andAppearance Care ............... 5-1

Service .......................... 5-3Fuel .............................. 5-5Checking Things Under

the Hood .................... 5-9Headlamp Aiming .......... 5-33Bulb Replacement ......... 5-35

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacement ............. 5-38

Tires ........................... 5-38Appearance Care .......... 5-66Vehicle Identification ...... 5-74Electrical System ........... 5-74Capacities and

Specifications ............ 5-81

Maintenance Schedule ...... 6-1Maintenance Schedule ..... 6-1

Customer AssistanceInformation ........................ 7-1

Customer Assistance andInformation ................. 7-1

Reporting SafetyDefects ..................... 7-12

Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy ............... 7-14

Index ....................................i-1

2009 Saturn VUE Green Line Hybrid Owner Manual M

SATURN, the SATURN Emblem,and the name VUE are registeredtrademarks of Saturn Corporation.GENERAL MOTORS and GMare registered trademarks ofGeneral Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latestinformation at the time it wasprinted. Saturn reserves the right tomake changes after that timewithout further notice.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on yourspecific vehicle.

Read this manual from beginning toend to learn about the vehicle’sfeatures and controls. Pictures,symbols, and words work togetherto explain vehicle operation.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123helminc.com

Propriétaires CanadiensOn peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès deconcessionnaire ou à l’adressesuivante:

Helm IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123helminc.com

About Driving YourVehicleAs with other vehicles of this type,failure to operate this vehiclecorrectly may result in loss of controlor an accident. Be sure to readthe “on-pavement” and “off-road”driving guidelines which follow in thismanual in the section called “YourDriving, the Road, and YourVehicle”.

ii Preface

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 25814240 A First Printing ©2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

IndexTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Safety Warnings andSymbols

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this” or “Do not letthis happen.”

A box with the word CAUTION isused to tell about things thatcould hurt you or others if you wereto ignore the warning.

{ CAUTION

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Cautions tell what the hazard is andwhat to do to avoid or reduce thehazard. Read these cautions.

A notice tells about something thatcan damage the vehicle.

Notice: These mean there issomething that could damageyour vehicle.

Many times, this damage would notbe covered by the vehicle’swarranty, and it could be costly. Thenotice tells what to do to helpavoid the damage.

There are also warning labels onthe vehicle which use the samewords, CAUTION or Notice.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols insteadof text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operationor information relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gage, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Preface iii

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering WheelControls or OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gage

+ : Fuses

i : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System Child Restraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

F : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid

iv Preface

Seats andRestraint System

Head RestraintsHead Restraints ..................1-2

Front SeatsManual Seats .....................1-3Seat Height Adjuster ...........1-4Power Seat ........................1-4Manual Lumbar ..................1-5Heated Seats .....................1-5Reclining Seatbacks ...........1-5Passenger FoldingSeatback ...........................1-7

Rear SeatsSplit Folding Rear Seat ......1-9

Safety BeltsSafety Belts: They Arefor Everyone ...................1-10

How to Wear SafetyBelts Properly ..................1-13

Lap-Shoulder Belt .............1-17Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy .......................1-22

Safety Belt Extender .........1-22

Child RestraintsOlder Children ..................1-22Infants and YoungChildren ..........................1-25

Child Restraint Systems ....1-27Where to Put theRestraint .........................1-29

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH) ..........................1-31

Securing a ChildRestraint in a RearSeat Position ...................1-36

Securing a ChildRestraint in the RightFront Seat Position .........1-38

Airbag SystemAirbag System ..................1-41Where Are the Airbags? ...1-44When Should an AirbagInflate? ............................1-45

What Makes an AirbagInflate? ............................1-47

How Does an AirbagRestrain? ........................1-47

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? ..........1-48

Passenger SensingSystem ............................1-49

Servicing YourAirbag-EquippedVehicle ............................1-54

Adding Equipment toYour Airbag-EquippedVehicle ............................1-55

Restraint System CheckChecking the RestraintSystems ..........................1-56

Replacing RestraintSystem Parts After aCrash ..............................1-57

Seats and Restraint System 1-1

Head RestraintsThe front and rear seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{ CAUTION

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinalinjury in a crash. Do not drive untilthe head restraints for alloccupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant’shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraint up toraise it. To lower the head restraint,press the button, located on thetop of the seatback, and push therestraint down.

Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The head restraints are notdesigned to be removed.

1-2 Seats and Restraint System

Active Head Restraint SystemThe vehicle has an active headrestraint system in the front outboardseating positions. The active headrestraints automatically tilt forward toreduce the risk of neck injury ifthe vehicle is hit from behind.

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{ CAUTION

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver’s seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver’s seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To move a manual seat forward orrearward:

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

Try to move the seat with your bodyto be sure the seat is locked inplace.


Seat Height Adjuster

If the vehicle has a manual driverseat height adjuster, it is located onthe outboard side of the seatnear the front of the seat cushion.

To raise the seat, move thelever upward repeatedly until theseat is at the desired height.To lower the seat, move the leverdownward repeatedly until theseat is at the desired height.

Power Seat

a : To adjust the seat:

Move the seat forward or rearward.

Raise or lower the front or rear partof the seat cushion.


Manual Lumbar

If the vehicle has this feature, theknob is located on the inboardside of the driver seatback.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the lumbar support.

Heated SeatsOn vehicles with heated front seatsthe controls are located on the centerconsole. The engine must be runningto operate the heated seats.

M (Heated Seat): Press thisbutton to turn on the heated seat.

The indicator light on the buttonshows that the feature is on and thelevel of heat, three being thehighest. Press the button to choosethe level of heat.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Reclining SeatbacksManual Reclining Seatbacks

{ CAUTION

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver’s seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver’s seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ CAUTION

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

On seats with manual recliningseatbacks, the lever used to operatethem is located on the outboardside of the seat.


To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desiredposition, then release the lever tolock the seatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to an uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback and the seatbackreturns to the upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

If the seats have power recliningseatbacks, the control used torecline them is located on theoutboard side of the seat.

• To recline the seatback, tilt thetop of the control rearward.

• To bring the seatback forward, tiltthe top of the control forward.

{ CAUTION

Sitting in a reclined position whenyour vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even if you buckle up,your safety belts cannot do theirjob when you are reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job.In a crash, you could go into it,receiving neck or other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash the belt could goup over your abdomen. The beltforces would be there, not at yourpelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear yoursafety belt properly.


Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Passenger FoldingSeatbackThe front passenger seatback mayfold flat.

{ CAUTION

If you fold the seatback forward tocarry longer objects, such as skis,be sure any such cargo is notnear an airbag. In a crash, aninflating airbag might force thatobject toward a person. Thiscould cause severe injury or evendeath. Secure objects away fromthe area in which an airbag wouldinflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 1-44 and Loading theVehicle on page 4-18.

{ CAUTION

Things you put on this seatbackcan strike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in a crash.Remove or secure all itemsbefore driving.

To fold the seatback:

1. Lower the head restraint allthe way.

2. Lift the bar under the front of theseat to unlock it. Slide the seatas far back as it will go andrelease the bar. Try to move theseat back and forth to makesure it is locked into place.


3. Lift the recliner lever, located onthe outboard side of the seat, upfully and fold the seatbackforward until it disengages.

4. Continue to fold the seat forwardinto the folded position.

5. Pull up on the seatback to besure it is locked.

To raise the seatback:

1. Lift the recliner lever, located onthe outboard side of the seat, upfully and push up on theseatback.

2. Continue raising the seatbackuntil the seatback re-engages.

{ CAUTION


3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.

The recliner lever is also used torecline the seatback while apassenger is seated. See RecliningSeatbacks on page 1-5.


Rear Seats

Split Folding Rear SeatThe rear split bench seatbacks canbe folded forward, upright, orpartially reclined, independent of theother seatback position.

{ CAUTION


{ CAUTION

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached, ortwisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

To fold the seatback down:

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

1. Unbuckle all three safety beltsand put the front seatback inan upright position.

2. Lift the lever located on the topof the seatback to release theseatback and fold the seatbackforward.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift and hold the lever located ontop of the seatback.

2. Tilt the seatback rearward, thenrelease the lever.


Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Arefor EveryoneThis section of the manual describeshow to use safety belts properly.It also describes some things not todo with safety belts.

{ CAUTION

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or beejected from the vehicle. You andyour passenger(s) can be seriouslyinjured or killed. In the same crash,you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten yoursafety belt, and check that yourpassenger(s) are restrainedproperly too.

{ CAUTION

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 3-24 for additional information.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requireswearing safety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will bein a crash. If you do have a crash,you do not know if it will be aserious one.

A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes arein between. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter... a lot!


Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it.

Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...


or the instrument panel...

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down asthe vehicle does. You get moretime to stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is whysafety belts make such good sense.

Questions and AnswersAbout Safety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safetybelt, even if you are upside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupantsstill have to buckle up to get themost protection. That is truenot only in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and othercollisions.


Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver does notprotect you from things beyondyour control, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km) of home. Andthe greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occurat speeds of less than 40 mph(65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safetybelts and children. And there aredifferent rules for smaller childrenand infants. If a child will be riding inthe vehicle, see Older Children onpage 1-22 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 1-25. Follow thoserules for everyone’s protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehiclein a crash. And they can strikeothers in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important informationyou should know.

Sit up straight and always keep yourfeet on the floor in front of you.The lap part of the belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strong pelvicbones and you would be lesslikely to slide under the lap belt. Ifyou slid under it, the belt wouldapply force on your abdomen. Thiscould cause serious or even


fatal injuries. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to take beltrestraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. Itwill not give as much protectionthis way.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously hurt if yourshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.


A: The lap belt is too loose. It willnot give nearly as muchprotection this way.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously hurt if yourlap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lap beltand apply force on your abdomen.This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The lap belt shouldbe worn low and snug on thehips, just touching the thighs.



A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt is buckled in the wrongplace like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there,not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your beltinto the buckle nearest you.


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt goes over an armrestlike this. The belt would be muchtoo high. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.



A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured ifyou wear the shoulder belt underyour arm. In a crash, your bodywould move too far forward, whichwould increase the chance ofhead and neck injury. Also, thebelt would apply too much forceto the ribs, which are not asstrong as shoulder bones. Youcould also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across thechest.


A: The belt is behind the body.


{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulderbelt. Your body could move toofar forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. Youmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not letit get twisted.


The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across youvery quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly tounlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the right frontseating position may affectthe passenger sensing system.See Passenger SensingSystem on page 1-49 for moreinformation.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 1-22.Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you.See “Shoulder Belt Height

Adjustment” later in this sectionfor instructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull thestitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.


To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the safetybelt webbing when the safety belt isnot in use. The latch plate shouldrest on the stitching on thesafety belt, near the guide loop onthe side wall.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjusterThe vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driverand right front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so that theshoulder portion of the belt iscentered on the shoulder. The beltshould be away from the faceand neck, but not falling off of theshoulder. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reducethe effectiveness of the safetybelt in a crash.

Squeeze the release buttons (A)together and move the heightadjuster up or down to the desiredposition.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it up ordown without squeezing the releasebuttons to make sure it has lockedinto position.


Safety Belt PretensionersThis vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safetybelt pretensioners cannot be seen,they are part of the safety beltassembly. They can help tighten thesafety belts during the earlystages of a moderate to severefrontal, near frontal, or rear crash ifthe threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.And, for vehicles with side impactairbags, safety belt pretensionerscan help tighten the safety belts in aside crash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced,and probably other new parts for thevehicle’s safety belt system. SeeReplacing Restraint SystemParts After a Crash on page 1-57.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guidesmay provide added safety beltcomfort for older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed on ashoulder belt, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.

There is one guide for eachoutboard passenger position in therear seat. Here is how to installa comfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage location, which is apocket on the side of the seat.

2. Place the guide over the belt andinsert the two edges of the beltinto the slots of the guide.


3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. The elasticcord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

{ CAUTION

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure that the shoulder beltcrosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide.Store the comfort guide in itsstorage location, which is a pocketon the side of the seat.


Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lap portionshould be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughoutthe pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is toprotect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the safety belt will fasten aroundyou, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer/retailer willorder you an extender. When you goin to order it, take the heaviestcoat you will wear, so the extenderwill be long enough for you. Tohelp avoid personal injury, do not letsomeone else use it, and use itonly for the seat it is made to fit. Theextender has been designed foradults. Never use it for securingchild seats. To wear it, attach it tothe regular safety belt. For moreinformation, see the instructionsheet that comes with the extender.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle’s safety belts.


The manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the booster seat, statethe weight and height limitations forthat booster. Use a booster seatwith a lap-shoulder belt untilthe child passes the below fit test:

• Sit all the way back on theseat. Do the knees bend at theseat edge? If yes, continue.If no, return to the booster seat.

• Buckle the lap-shoulderbelt. Does the shoulder belt reston the shoulder? If yes,continue. If no, try using the rearsafety belt comfort guide. See“Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belton page 1-17 for moreinformation. If the shoulder beltstill does not rest on the shoulder,then return to the booster seat.

• Does the lap belt fit low and snugon the hips, touching the thighs?If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

• Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length ofthe trip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force tothe child’s pelvic bones in acrash. It should never be wornover the abdomen, whichcould cause severe or even fatalinternal injuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belton page 1-17.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safetybelts properly.


{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law inevery state in the United States andin every Canadian province sayschildren up to some age mustbe restrained while in a vehicle.

{ CAUTION

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young childrenride in vehicles, they should havethe protection provided byappropriate child restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people, orcan be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

For example, in a crash at only25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg)infant will suddenly become a240 lb (110 kg) force on aperson’s arms. An infant shouldbe secured in an appropriaterestraint.


{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Children who are up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicle’sowner, are available in fourbasic types. Selection of aparticular restraint should takeinto consideration not only thechild’s weight, height, and age butalso whether or not the restraintwill be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint,be sure it is designed to be usedin a motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with specialneeds.


{ CAUTION

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant’s neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash, aninfant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant’s body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ CAUTION

A young child’s hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle’s regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

A rear-facing infant seat (A) providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned inthe restraint.

(A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat


A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child’s bodywith the harness.

A booster seat (C) is a childrestraint designed to improve the fitof the vehicle’s safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ CAUTION

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat(C) Booster Seats


To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 1-31 for moreinformation. A child can beendangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly securedin the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructions thatcome with the restraint which maybe on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ CAUTION

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the child properlyfollowing the instructions thatcame with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facing childseat; an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.


A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facingchild is so great, if the airbagdeploys.

{ CAUTION

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the right front passengerairbag inflates. This is because theback of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if theright front passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbag isoff. If you secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 1-49 for additionalinformation.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with your childrestraint to make sure it is compatiblewith this vehicle.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no childis in it.


Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchorsin the vehicle and attachmentson the child restraint that are madefor use with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle’s safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also use eitherthe lower anchors or the safety beltsto properly secure the child restraint.A child restraint must never beinstalled using only the top tetherand anchor.

In order to use the LATCH systemin your vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use thechild restraint and its attachments.The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metalbars built into the vehicle. Thereare two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).


Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the topof the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchorin the vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotationof the child restraint during drivingor in a crash.

Your child restraint may havea single tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have toptethers are designed for usewith or without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions for yourchild restraint.

If the child restraint does not have atop tether, one can be obtained,in kit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturerwhether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seating positionswith two lower anchors.

Rear Seat


To assist you in locating the loweranchors, each seating positionwith lower anchors has two labels,near the crease between theseatback and the seat cushion.

To assist you in locating the toptether anchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is located near the toptether anchors.

The top tether anchors are locatedon the back of the rear seatback.Be sure to use an anchor located onthe same side of the vehicle asthe seating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tetheranchor if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether beattached, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say thatthe top tether must be attached.

Accident statistics show that childrenare safer if they are restrained in therear rather than the front seat. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 1-29 for additional information.


Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCH System

{ CAUTION

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that camewith the child restraint and theinstructions in this manual.

{ CAUTION

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break during acrash. A child or others could beinjured. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, attach only one childrestraint per anchor.

{ CAUTION

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock, ifyour vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.


Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lower attachmentsor the desired seating positiondoes not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with thetop tether and the safety belts.Refer to your child restraintmanufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.1.1. Find the lower anchors for

the desired seating position.1.2. Put the child restraint on

the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions and thefollowing steps:2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Route, attach, and tighten

the top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether over the seatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint andyou are using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.


If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint andyou are using a dual tether,route the tether aroundthe headrest or headrestraint.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint andyou are using a singletether, raise the headrest orhead restraint and routethe tether under theheadrest or head restraintand in between the headrestor head restraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraintin different directions to be sureit is secure.

Securing a ChildRestraint in a Rear SeatPositionWhen securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH)on page 1-31 for how and where toinstall the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint is securedin the vehicle using a safety beltand it uses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 1-31 for top tetheranchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come withthe child restraint say that the topstrap must be anchored.


In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will be usingthe safety belt to secure the childrestraint in this position. Be sure tofollow the instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure thechild in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in therear seat, be sure to read Where toPut the Restraint on page 1-29.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, andrun the lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.


5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of thebelt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful to useyour knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tightenthe belt.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH)on page 1-31 for moreinformation.


To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing a ChildRestraint in the RightFront Seat PositionThe vehicle has airbags. A rear seatis a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 1-29.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 1-49and Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 3-26 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.


{ CAUTION

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbag isoff. If you secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 1-49 for additionalinformation.


If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH)on page 1-31 for how and where toinstall the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint is securedusing a safety belt and it uses atop tether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH)on page 1-31 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come withthe child restraint say that the topstrap must be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached.


You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off theright front passenger frontalairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag status indicatorshould light and stay lit whenthe vehicle is started. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 3-26.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.


6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of thebelt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful to useyour knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tightenthe belt.

7. If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restrainthas a top tether, follow thechild restraint manufacturer’sinstructions regarding the useof the top tether. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 1-31 formore information.


If the airbag is off, the off indicatorin the passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has beeninstalled and the on indicator is lit,see “If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint ” under PassengerSensing System on page 1-49 formore information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right frontpassenger.

• A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver.

• A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the right frontpassenger.

• A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

• A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and thepassenger seated directly behindthe right front passenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attachedlabel near the deployment opening.


For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel forthe driver and on the instrumentpanel for the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAGwill appear on the side of theseatback closest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Even if you do not have a right frontpassenger seat in the vehiclethere is still an active frontal airbagin the right side of the instrumentpanel. Do not place cargo in front ofthis airbag.

{ CAUTION

Be sure that cargo is not near anairbag. In a crash, an inflatingairbag might force that objecttoward a person. This couldcause severe injury or evendeath. Secure objects away fromthe area in which an airbag wouldinflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 1-44 and Loading theVehicle on page 4-18.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today’s airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags mustinflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ CAUTION

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt — even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 1-45.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.


{ CAUTION

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ CAUTION

Children who are up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer protection for adultsand older children, but not foryoung children and infants.Neither the vehicle’s safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young childrenand infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system canprovide. Always secure childrenproperly in your vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children onpage 1-22 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 1-25.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 3-25 formore information.


Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger side.

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar


The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

{ CAUTION

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properly orit might force the object into thatperson causing severe injury oreven death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver’s or rightfront passenger’s head and chest.However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based onhow fast your vehicle is traveling. Itdepends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.

Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar


Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationaryobject, the airbags could inflate ata different crash speed than if thevehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags. SeeAirbag System on page 1-41.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intendedto inflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof-railairbags are intended to inflate duringa rollover or in a severe frontalimpact. Seat-mounted side impactand roof-rail airbags will inflate if thecrash severity is above the

system’s designed threshold level.The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not intended to inflate infrontal impacts, near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-railairbags are not intended to inflate inrear impacts. A seat-mountedside impact airbag is intended todeploy on the side of the vehicle thatis struck. Both roof-rail airbagswill deploy when either side of thevehicle is struck, or if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicleis about to roll over, or in a severefrontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag shouldhave inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were.For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down. Forseat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment


is determined by the location andseverity of the side impact. Ina rollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined bythe direction of the roll.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fillsthe airbag causing the bag to breakout of the cover and deploy. Theinflator, the airbag, and relatedhardware are all part of the airbagmodule.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags,there are airbag modules in the sideof the front seatbacks closest tothe door. For vehicles with roof-railairbags, there are airbag modules

in the ceiling of the vehicle, near theside windows that have occupantseating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel.In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupantscan contact the inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over theoccupant’s upper body, stopping theoccupant more gradually.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly overthe occupant’s upper body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help containthe head and chest of occupants inthe outboard seating positions inthe first and second rows. Therollover capable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the riskof full or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant’s motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 1-45 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.


What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some timeafter they deploy. Some componentsof the airbag module may be hotfor several minutes. For location ofthe airbag modules, see WhatMakes an Airbag Inflate? onpage 1-47.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. Theremay be some smoke and dustcoming from the vents in thedeflated airbags. Airbag inflationdoes not prevent the driverfrom seeing out of the windshield orbeing able to steer the vehicle,nor does it prevent people fromleaving the vehicle.

{ CAUTION

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannot getout of the vehicle after an airbaginflates, then get fresh air byopening a window or a door. Ifyou experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors,turn the interior lamps on, and turnthe hazard warning flashers onwhen the airbags inflate. You canlock the doors, turn the interiorlamps off, and turn the hazardwarning flashers off by using the

controls for those features. Youmust first, however, turn the ignitionkey to the following ignition switchpositions:

1. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

2. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN.

In many crashes severe enoughto inflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system. Ifyou do not get them, the airbagsystem will not be there tohelp protect you in another crash.A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers theneed to replace other parts.


• The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after a crash.See Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy on page 7-14and Event Data Recorders onpage 7-14.

• Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will notwork properly. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will bevisible on the instrument panel whenthe vehicle is started.

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, are visibleduring the system check. If you areusing remote start, if equipped,to start the vehicle from a distance,you may not see the system

check. When the system check iscomplete, either the word ONor OFF, or the symbol for on or off,will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 3-26.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbagsand the roof-rail airbags are notaffected by the passenger sensingsystem.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger seatand safety belt. The sensors aredesigned to detect the presence ofa properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the right frontpassenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbagshould be enabled (may inflate)or not.

United States

Canada


According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in a correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ CAUTION

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the right front passengerairbag inflates. This is because theback of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if theright front passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

(if equipped), no system isfail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deployunder some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, evenif the airbag(s) are off. If yousecure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.



The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the rightfront passenger airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag if:

• The right front passenger seatis unoccupied.

• The system determines that aninfant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

• The system determines that asmall child is present in achild restraint.

• The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

• A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seatfor a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat isoccupied by a smaller person,such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litto remind you that the airbagsare off. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 3-26.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size issitting properly in the right frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbags tobe enabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbags are active.


For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints and for verysmall adults, the passenger sensingsystem may or may not turn off theright front passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag, depending upon the person’sseating posture and body build.Everyone in the vehicle who hasoutgrown child restraints should weara safety belt properly —whether ornot there is an airbag for that person.

{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 3-25 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild RestraintIf a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraint manufacturerand refer to Securing a ChildRestraint in the Right Front SeatPosition on page 1-38.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion, ifadjustable, to make sure that thevehicle seatback is not pushingthe child restraint into the seatcushion.Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 1-2.

6. Restart the vehicle.If the on indicator is still lit withan infant present in a childrestraint, secure the childrestraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and see yourdealer/retailer.


If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat.

If this happens, use the followingsteps to allow the system to detectthat person and enable the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright in theseat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after theon indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem OperationSafety belts help keep the passengerin position on the seat during vehiclemaneuvers and braking, which helpsthe passenger sensing systemmaintain the passenger airbagstatus. See “Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.


A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion, oraftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipmentto Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 1-55 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

{ CAUTION

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer/retailer and the servicemanual have information aboutservicing the vehicle and the airbagsystem. To purchase a servicemanual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 7-13.

{ CAUTION

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and the batteryis disconnected, an airbag can stillinflate during improper service.You can be injured if you are closeto an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They areprobably part of the airbag system.Be sure to follow proper serviceprocedures, and make sure theperson performing work for you isqualified to do so.


Adding Equipment toYour Airbag-EquippedVehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about thevehicle that could keep theairbags from workingproperly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle’s frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillargarnish trim, front sensors, sideimpact sensors, rolloversensor module, or airbag wiringcan affect the operation ofthe airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position,which includes sensors that arepart of the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system maynot operate properly if the originalseat trim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery or trim, orwith GM covers, upholstery ortrim designed for a differentvehicle. Any object, such as anaftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad or device,installed under or on top ofthe seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing system fromproperly turning off the passengerairbag(s). See PassengerSensing System on page 1-49.

If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phonenumbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are in StepTwo of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. SeeCustomer Satisfaction Procedureon page 7-1.

If the vehicle has rolloverroof-rail airbags, see DifferentSize Tires and Wheels onpage 5-53 for additionalimportant information.


Q: Because I have a disability, Ihave to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phonenumbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are in StepTwo of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. SeeCustomer Satisfaction Procedureon page 7-1.

In addition, your dealer/retailer andthe service manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.

Restraint SystemCheck

Checking the RestraintSystemsSafety BeltsNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.

Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See yourdealer/retailer to have it repaired.Torn or frayed safety belts may notprotect you in a crash. They canrip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a newone right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 3-24 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Care of Safety Belts onpage 5-69.

AirbagsThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure theairbag readiness light is working.See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 3-25 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag coveringis damaged, opened, or broken,the airbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are any openedor broken airbag covers, havethe airbag covering and/or airbagmodule replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 1-47. See yourdealer/retailer for service.


Replacing RestraintSystem Parts After aCrash

{ CAUTION

A crash can damage the restraintsystems in your vehicle. Adamaged restraint system maynot properly protect the personusing it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To helpmake sure your restraint systemsare working properly after a crash,have them inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assembliesthat were used during any crashmay have been stressed ordamaged. See your dealer/retailerto have the safety belt assembliesinspected or replaced.

If the vehicle has the LATCHsystem and it was being used duringa crash, you may need newLATCH system parts.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety belt orLATCH system (if equipped),was not being used at the time ofthe crash.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seethe part on the airbag system earlierin this section.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicle,or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 3-25.

If an airbag inflates or the vehiclehas been in a crash, the vehicle’ssensing system may commandthe automatic hybrid batterydisconnect to open. The battery willdisconnect. The hybrid batterywill be off and the vehicle will notstart. The airbag readiness light maycome on. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 3-25 for moreinformation. To operate the vehicle,the automatic hybrid batterydisconnect must be reconnected bya qualified service technician andsensing system parts will need to bereplaced. Have the vehicleserviced right away.


✍ NOTES


Features andControls

KeysKeys ...................................2-2Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System ...................2-3

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation ...2-4

Doors and LocksDoor Locks .........................2-6Power Door Locks ..............2-6Delayed Locking .................2-6Automatic Door Lock ..........2-7Automatic Door Unlock .......2-7Rear Door SecurityLocks ................................2-7

Lockout Protection ..............2-7Liftgate ...............................2-8

WindowsWindows .............................2-9Power Windows ..................2-9Sun Visors ........................2-10

Theft-Deterrent SystemsTheft-Deterrent Systems ....2-10Content Theft-Deterrent .....2-10PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizer ......................2-12

PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizer Operation ......2-12

Starting and OperatingYour VehicleNew Vehicle Break-In .......2-14Ignition Positions ...............2-14Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) ...................2-15

Starting the Engine(Automatic EngineStart/Stop) .......................2-15

Engine Coolant Heater ......2-19Automatic TransmissionOperation ........................2-20

Parking Brake ...................2-22

Regenerative Braking ........2-23Shifting Into Park ..............2-23Shifting Out of Park ..........2-25Parking Over ThingsThat Burn ........................2-25

Engine Exhaust .................2-26Running the VehicleWhile Parked ..................2-26

MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror ....2-27Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror ...............2-27

Outside Power Mirrors ......2-28Outside Convex Mirror ......2-28Outside Heated Mirrors .....2-28

OnStar® SystemOnStar® System ................2-29

Universal Home RemoteSystemUniversal Home RemoteSystem ............................2-32

Universal Home RemoteSystem Operation ............2-33

Features and Controls 2-1

Storage AreasGlove Box .........................2-37Cupholders .......................2-37Sunglasses StorageCompartment ...................2-37

Center Console Storage ....2-37Driver StorageCompartment ...................2-38

Rear Seat Armrest ............2-38Convenience Net ..............2-38Cargo Cover .....................2-38Cargo Tie Downs ..............2-39Cargo ManagementSystem ............................2-39

Keys

{ CAUTION

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons, children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The two keys can be used for theignition and all locks.

The key code is stamped on the keynumber plate and can be used tomake new keys at any dealer/retailer. Store this information in asafe place outside the vehicle.

2-2 Features and Controls

Notice: If you ever lock yourkeys in the vehicle, you may haveto damage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.

If you are locked out of the vehicle,contact Roadside Assistance. SeeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 7-5 for more information.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemIf this vehicle has the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) system, itoperates on a radio frequencysubject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions:

1. This device may not causeinterference.

2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following twoconditions:


2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to thissystem by other than an authorizedservice facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range, try this:

• Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle. Stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehiclesor objects may be blocking thesignal. Take a few steps to the leftor right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check the transmitter’s battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

• If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer/retailer or a qualifiedtechnician for service.


Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to65 feet (20 m) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions which canaffect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2-3.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors, including the liftgate.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlockthe driver door. If K is pressedagain within five seconds, all otherdoors unlock. The interior lampscome on for 20 seconds or until theignition is turned on.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release toactivate the alarm. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and hold L for more thantwo seconds and the turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsfor 30 seconds.

To turn the alarm off, press L againor turn the ignition to ON/RUN.


Programming Transmitters tothe VehicleOnly RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer/retailer. When the replacementtransmitter is programmed to thevehicle, all remaining transmittersmust also be programmed. Any lostor stolen transmitters no longer workonce the new transmitter isprogrammed. Each vehicle can haveup to eight transmitters programmedto it. See “HOLD STEM TORELEARN REMOTE KEY” underDIC Operation and Displays onpage 3-36.

Battery ReplacementReplace the battery if the REPLACEREMOTE KEY FOB BATTERYmessage displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See“REPLACE REMOTE KEY FOBBATTERY” under DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-42.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damagethe transmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat thin object inserted into thenotch on the side.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace witha CR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Reassemble the transmitter.


Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{ CAUTION

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

• Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. You increase thechance of being thrown out ofthe vehicle in a crash if thedoors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lockthe doors whenever you drive.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock yourvehicle whenever you leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To lock or unlock a door, use thekey from the outside or the door lockfrom the inside.

Power Door Locks

T : The power door lock switchesare located on the driver door.

• Press the right side of the switchto unlock the doors.

• Remove the ignition key andpress the left side of the switch tolock all of the doors.

Delayed LockingA chime will sound to indicate adoor or liftgate is open when you tryto lock the doors with the powerdoor lock switch. The doors will notlock, and the theft-deterrentsystem will not arm until all thedoors are closed and five secondshave passed.


Automatic Door LockThe doors are programmed toautomatically lock when the shiftlever is moved into a forward gear.

The automatic door lock featurecannot be disabled.

Automatic Door UnlockThe doors will automaticallyunlock when the shift lever is movedinto (P) Park.

Rear Door SecurityLocksThe vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengersfrom opening the rear doors fromthe inside.

Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edgeof each door.

To set the locks, insert a key into theslot and turn it to the horizontalposition. The door can only beopened from the outside with thedoor unlocked. To return the door tonormal operation, turn the slot to thevertical position.

Lockout ProtectionWhen the power door lock switch ispressed with the key in the ignition,and any door is open, all the doorslock and the driver door unlocks.When doors are closed with the keyin the ignition, the horn will sound asa reminder.

If the doors are locked with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter, and the key is in theignition, a chime sounds andall except the driver door lock.

The lockout protection feature can beoverridden by holding the power doorlock switch for three seconds.


Liftgate

{ CAUTION

Exhaust gases may enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

• Close all of the windows.• Fully open the air outlets on or

under the instrument panel.• Adjust the Climate Control

system to a setting that bringsin only outside air and set thefan speed to the highestsetting. See Climate ControlSystem in the Index.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 2-26.

To lock or unlock the liftgate, pressthe button on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter twiceor the power door lock switch.

To open the liftgate, pressthe touchpad on the underside ofthe liftgate handle and pull up.

To close the liftgate, pull down usingthe handle and close until it latches.

Liftgate Operation with Loss ofPower

To open the liftgate if the vehicle’sbattery is disconnected or thevoltage is low, access the releaselever. Remove the interior trim coveron the inside of the liftgate. Use atool to push the lever on thelatch until the liftgate releases.


Windows

{ CAUTION

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

Power Windows

{ CAUTION

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

The windows will function andthey could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavekeys in a vehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

The window switches for all doorsare located on the driver door.Each door also has a switch.


To open or close a window, pressor pull up on the switch.

The power windows operate whenthe ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY, or while inRetained Accessory Power (RAP).See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 2-15.

Express-Down WindowThe driver window switch has anexpress-down feature that lowersthe window without holding theswitch. Press the switch part wayand the window will open asmall amount. Press the switchdown all the way and release it andthe window lowers all the way.

To stop the window while itis lowering, press and release theswitch.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): Thevehicle has a lockout feature toprevent rear seat passengers fromoperating the windows. Pressthe lockout button, located with thepower window switches, to turnthe feature on and off.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing the sunvisor down, or detach the driver sunvisor from the center mount andslide it along the rod fromside-to-side.

On a visor with a mirror, lift thecover to use it.

Theft-DeterrentSystemsVehicle theft is big business,especially in some cities. This vehiclehas theft-deterrent features,however, they do not make itimpossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentThis vehicle may have a contenttheft-deterrent alarm system.

The security light is located near thecenter of the instrument panel.

United States shown,Canada similar


To arm the theft-deterrent system,close all doors and press Q on theRKE transmitter. The security lightcomes on solid for approximately30 seconds and then flashes slowly.If Q is pressed a second time, thetheft-deterrent system activatesimmediately. The content theftdeterrent alarm is not armed untilthe security light flashes slowly.

If any door or the liftgate are openedwithout using the key or pressingK on the RKE transmitter, theexterior lamps flash and the hornsounds for about 30 seconds. If Q orK on the RKE transmitter is notpressed, the alarm sounds andperiodically repeats. If the systemdoes not operate as describedabove, see your dealer/retailerfor service.

The theft-deterrent system alsoactivates if the doors are lockedwith the key.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident, always unlock a doorwith the RKE transmitter or a key.Unlocking a door any other waysets off the alarm if the systemhas been armed.

If the alarm is set off by accident,press Q or K on the RKEtransmitter or place the key inthe ignition and turn it to STARTto turn it off.

Testing the AlarmTo test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, lowerthe driver’s window and openthe driver door.

2. Get out of the vehicle, close thedoor and activate the system bypressing Q on the RKEtransmitter.

3. Wait for the security light toflash slowly.

4. Reach in through the window tounlock the door with the manualdoor lock and open the door.This should set off the alarm.

If the alarm does not sound when itshould, but the vehicle’s headlampsflash, check to see if the hornworks. The horn fuse may be blown.To replace the fuse, see Fusesand Circuit Breakers on page 5-75.

If the alarm does not sound orthe vehicle’s headlamps donot flash, see your dealer/retailerfor service.


PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizerThe PASS-Key III+ system operateson a radio frequency subject toFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry Canada.


1. This device may not causeharmful interference.

2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation.

This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:


2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications tothis system by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

PASS-Key III+ uses a radiofrequency transponder in the keythat matches a decoder in thevehicle.

PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizer OperationThis vehicle has PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key® III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed fromthe ignition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light comes on if there isa problem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

When the PASS-Key® III+ systemsenses that someone is usingthe wrong key, it prevents thevehicle from starting. Anyone usinga trial-and-error method to startthe vehicle will be discouragedbecause of the high numberof electrical key codes.


When trying to start the vehicle ifthe engine does not start andthe security light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on, theremay be a problem with yourtheft-deterrent system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start,and the key appears to be notdamaged, wait about five minutesand try another ignition key andcheck the fuse. See Fusesand Circuit Breakers on page 5-75.If the engine still does not startwith the other key, the vehicleneeds service. If the vehicle doesstart, the first key may be faulty.See your dealer/retailer whocan service the PASS-Key® III+to have a new key made. Inan emergency, contact RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 7-5.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+decoder to “learn” the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 keys may be programmedfor the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programmingadditional keys only. If all thecurrently programmed keys arelost or do not operate, you must seeyour dealer/retailer or a locksmithwho can service PASS-Key® III+to have keys made and programmedto the system.

See your dealer/retailer or alocksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new keyblank that is cut exactly as theignition key that operates the system.

To program the new key:

1. Verify that the new key hasa 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmedkey in the ignition and start theengine. If the engine does notstart, see your dealer/retailerfor service.

3. After the engine has started, turnthe key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmedand turn it to the ON/RUNposition within five seconds ofthe original key being turnedto the LOCK/OFF position.The security light turns off oncethe key has been programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4if additional keys are to beprogrammed.

If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost ordamaged, see your dealer/retaileror a locksmith to have a newkey made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.


Starting andOperating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle doesnot need an elaborate break-in.But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow theseguidelines:

• Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 500 miles (805 km).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops forthe first 200 miles (322 km)or so. During this time thenew brake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops with newlinings can mean prematurewear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-inguideline every time youget new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Towing aTrailer on page 4-26 for thetrailer towing capabilitiesof your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and applythe regular brake pedal.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switchor break the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all theway in, and turn it only withyour hand. If the key cannot beturned by hand, see yourdealer/retailer.

LOCK/OFF: This position locks theignition. It also locks the steeringwheel and the transmission. The keycan only be removed in LOCK/OFF.The shift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning the keyto ACC/ACCESSORY. If this doesn’twork, the vehicle needs service.


ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This isthe position in which you can operatethe electrical accessories or itemsplugged into the accessory poweroutlets.

Use this position if the vehicle mustbe pushed or towed.

ON/RUN: This position can be usedto operate the electrical accessoriesand to display some instrumentpanel cluster warning and indicatorlights. The switch stays in thisposition when the engine is running.The transmission is also unlocked inthis position. If you leave the key inthe ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNpositions with the engine off, thebattery could be drained. You maynot be able to start the vehicle if thebattery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

START: This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN for driving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened, the ignition isin ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFand the key is in the ignition.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories may beused for up to 10 minutes afterthe ignition key is turned off:

• Outside Mirror

• Power Windows

• Radio

All these features work when theignition key is in the ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY positions,until a door is opened.

Starting the Engine(Automatic EngineStart/Stop)Place the transmission in theproper gear.

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damagethe transmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator

pedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as your engine getswarm. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.


Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking for afew seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does not startand the key is held in START,cranking stops after 15 secondsto prevent cranking motordamage. To prevent geardamage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engine isalready running. Engine crankingcan be stopped by turning theignition switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFposition.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after5-10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START for amaximum of 15 seconds. Wait atleast 15 seconds between eachtry, to allow the cranking motor tocool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and

accelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again,repeat the procedure. This clearsthe extra gasoline from theengine. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designedto work with the electronics inyour vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engineoperates. Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer/retailer. If you do not,your engine might not performproperly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by yourvehicle’s warranty.


Automatic Engine Start/Stop

{ CAUTION

There is something about thevehicle that can make it movesuddenly, and you or others canbe seriously injured. This canhappen if the vehicle is in theAuto Stop mode, and the shiftlever is in D (Drive). Because thevehicle has the Automatic EngineStart/Stop feature, the vehicle’sengine might seem to be shut offwhen you come to a completestop. However, if you then start toexit the vehicle, as soon as youtake your foot off the brake pedal,the engine will start again and thevehicle can move forward. If youare going to exit the vehicle,first shift to P (Park) and turn theignition to LOCK/OFF. Then exit.

The vehicle has an automaticengine start/stop feature that isa part of the hybrid system. After theengine is started and has reachedoperating temperature, the AUTOSTOP feature may turn theengine off when you apply thebrakes and come to a completestop. When you take your footoff the brake pedal or press theaccelerator pedal, the enginewill start. The engine will continueto run until the next AUTO STOP.

The AUTO STOP mark on thetachometer indicates that the engineis in AUTO STOP mode. If thedriver door is opened while in AUTOSTOP mode, a chime will sound.

If you are on an incline, the vehiclemay roll backwards a short distanceuntil the engine performs an AUTOSTART. The Hill Start Assist featurewill help start the vehicle on amoderate or steep incline. To restartthe engine during the AUTO STOP,release the brake pedal or press theaccelerator pedal. The engine startsimmediately. The vehicle continuesto run until the next stop.

There are several conditions thatmay prevent an AUTO STOPor cause an AUTO START.


The Engine Will RemainRunning When:

• The engine, transmission, orhybrid battery is not warmedup yet.

• The outside temperature ishigh — usually above95°F (35°C) and the climatecontrol system is working tocool the vehicle in A/C mode(yellow light illuminated onA/C button) or if defrost isselected. See Automatic ClimateControl System on page 3-17for more information.

• The shift lever is in P (Park),R (Reverse), N (Neutral) orM (Manual Mode).

• The hybrid battery packcharge is low.

• The 12V vehicle battery chargeis low, or loads are high.

• The hood is not fully closed.

The Engine Will Restart When:

• The brake pedal is released.

• The accelerator pedal is applied.

• When shifting from D (Drive)to P (Park), R (Reverse),N (Neutral) or M (Manual Mode),the engine will restartimmediately.

• If the A/C button (green lightilluminated on A/C) button isselected, the duration ofthe AUTO STOP will depend onthe outside temperature. Thiseconomy mode improvesfuel economy by limiting theeffects of the air conditioning.The warmer it is outside,the shorter the time before theengine is restarted to providecabin cooling.

• The climate control system isturned from Off to On (econor normal A/C, or floor/defog/defrost) See AutomaticClimate Control System onpage 3-17 for more information.

• The engine is required to run foreither heater or climate controlperformance. See “AirConditioning and EngineStart/Stop” under AutomaticClimate Control System onpage 3-17 for more information.

• The hybrid battery pack charge islow and requires recharging.

• Auto Stop time is greater thantwo minutes.


Engine Coolant HeaterThe engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicleswith an engine coolant heater shouldbe plugged in at least four hoursbefore starting. Some modelsmay have an internal thermostatin the cord which will prevent enginecoolant heater operation attemperatures above 0°F (−18°C).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The enginecoolant heater cord is locatednear the air cleaner box onthe passenger side of the enginecompartment. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-10 for more informationon location.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ CAUTION

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keepit away from moving engineparts. If you do not, it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer/retailerin the area where you will beparking the vehicle for the bestadvice on this.


Automatic TransmissionOperationThe shift lever is located on theconsole between the seats.

There are several different positionsfor the automatic transmission.

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when you start the enginebecause the vehicle cannotmove easily.

{ CAUTION

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless you haveto. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, always set theparking brake and move the shiftlever to P (Park). See Shifting IntoPark on page 2-23. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 4-26.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You have to fully apply theregular brakes first and then press

the shift lever button before you canshift from P (Park) when the ignitionkey is in RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever and push the shift lever allthe way into P (Park) as you maintainbrake application. Then press theshift lever button and move the shiftlever into another gear. See ShiftingOut of Park on page 2-25.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse)only after the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back andforth to get out of snow, ice or sandwithout damaging the transmission,see If Your Vehicle is Stuck inSand, Mud, Ice, or Snow onpage 4-17.


N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect withthe wheels. To restart the enginewhen the vehicle is already moving,use N (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{ CAUTION

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift intoa drive gear while the engine isrunning at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be surethe engine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is for normaldriving with the automatictransmission. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 35 mph(55 km/h), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h),push the accelerator all theway down.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding, see “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 4-11.

M (Manual Mode): This positionallows you to change gears similarto a manual transmission. If thevehicle has this feature, see ManualShift Mode.

Notice: Spinning the tires orholding the vehicle in one placeon a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. The repairwill not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If you are stuck, donot spin the tires. When stoppingon a hill, use the brakes tohold the vehicle in place.


Manual Shift Mode (MSM)(Automatic Transmission)To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) rearward to theM (Manual Mode).The display will show a 3 forthird gear.When coming to a stop inthe manual position, thevehicle will automatically shiftto 1 (First) gear.

2. Press the plus (+) button toupshift or the minus (−) buttonto downshift.

While driving in MSM, the vehiclewill have sportier performance. Usethis when you want the vehicleto stay in gear longer or to downshiftfor more power or engine braking.

The transmission will only allow youto shift into a gear range appropriatefor the vehicle speed.

• The transmission will notautomatically shift to the nexthigher gear range withoutpressing the button on theshifter handle.

• The transmission will not allowshifting to the next lower gearif the vehicle speed is too high.

If the vehicle does not respond to agear change, or detects a problemwith the transmission, the rangeof gears may be reduced andthe Malfunction Indicator Lampwill come on. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 3-30.

Parking Brake

The parking brake lever is located inthe center console between thefront seats.

To set the parking brake, hold thebrake pedal down and pull up on theparking brake lever. If the ignitionis in ON/RUN, the brake systemwarning light will come on.


To release the parking brake, holdthe brake pedal down. Pull theparking brake lever up until you canpress the release button. Holdthe release button in as you movethe brake lever all the way down.

Release the parking brakebefore driving the vehicle.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat thebrake system and causepremature wear or damage tobrake system parts. Makesure that the parking brake isfully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

Regenerative BrakingRegenerative braking takes some ofthe energy from the movingvehicle and turns it back intoelectrical energy. This energy isthen stored back into the vehicle’shybrid battery system, contributingto increased fuel efficiency.

The system works whenever youtake your foot off the acceleratorpedal while the vehicle is moving in aforward gear. This causes thevehicle to slow down more quickly. Itmay feel like the brake pedal is beingpressed, even when it is not.

Shifting Into Park

{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 4-26.

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 2-22 formore information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by pressing the button on theshift lever and pushing the leverall the way toward the front ofthe vehicle.


3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the key, the vehicle is inP (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running

{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehiclewith the engine running, be surethe vehicle is in P (Park) andthe parking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you havemoved the shift lever into P (Park),hold the regular brake pedaldown. Then, see if you can movethe shift lever away from P (Park)without first pressing the buttonon the console shift lever. If you can,it means that the shift lever wasnot fully locked into P (Park).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in the transmission.

You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of P (Park). This iscalled “torque lock.” To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park) properlybefore you leave the driver seat. Tofind out how, see Shifting Into Parkon page 2-23.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehiclepush yours a little uphill to takesome of the pressure from theparking pawl in the transmission, soyou can pull the shift lever out ofP (Park).


Shifting Out of ParkThe vehicle has an electronic shiftlock release system. The shiftlock release is designed to:

• Prevent ignition key removalunless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

• Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unlessthe ignition is in ON/RUN and theregular brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (lessthan 9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 5-28 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consultyour dealer/retailer or a professionaltowing service.

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ CAUTION

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass, orother things that can burn.


Engine Exhaust

{ CAUTION

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:• The vehicle idles in areas

with poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

• The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

• The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

• The vehicle’s exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after-marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected or ifit is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

• Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

• Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ CAUTION

Exiting the vehicle, without firstshifting into P (Park), may causethe vehicle to move, and you orothers can be seriously injured.Because the vehicle has theAutomatic Engine Start/Stopfeature, the vehicle’s engine mightseem to be shut off when youcome to a complete stop.However, once the brake pedal isreleased, the vehicle can move.The vehicle’s engine can alsorestart at any time.

Shift to P (Park) and turn theignition to LOCK/OFF, beforeexiting the vehicle.


{ CAUTION

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 2-26.

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 2-23.

If parking on a hill and pullinga trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 4-26.

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorThe vehicle has a manual rearviewmirror. It can be adjusted byholding the mirror in the center tomove it for a clearer view behindyour vehicle. Reduce the glareof headlamps from behind bypushing the lever forward or pullingit back for daytime/nighttime use.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle has an automaticdimming rearview mirror.

Vehicles with OnStar® havethree additional control buttonsfor the OnStar® system. See yourdealer/retailer for more information

about OnStar® and how to subscribeto it. See OnStar® System onpage 2-29 for more informationabout the services OnStar®

provides.

O (On/Off): Press to turn thedimming feature on or off.

Automatic Dimming MirrorOperationThe automatic dimming mirrorreduces the glare from theheadlamps of the vehicle behindyou. The dimming feature comes onand the indicator light illuminateseach time the ignition is turnedto start.


Outside Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on thedriver door.

To adjust the power mirrors:

1. Turn the knob to choose theleft (L) or the (R) right mirror.

2. Adjust each mirror so that you cansee the side of your vehicle andthe area behind your vehicle.

3. Return the control to the centerposition so the mirror cannot bemoved.

The mirrors can be manually foldedinward toward the vehicle. Returnto the original position to usecorrectly.

Outside Convex Mirror

{ CAUTION

A convex mirror can make things(like other vehicles) look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror’s surfaceis curved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Outside Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with outside heatedmirrors:

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the outside rearviewmirrors. See “Rear WindowDefogger” under Automatic ClimateControl System on page 3-17 formore information.


OnStar® System

OnStar uses several innovativetechnologies and live advisors toprovide a wide range of safety,security, information, andconvenience services. If the airbagsdeploy, the system is designed tomake an automatic call to OnStarEmergency advisors who canrequest emergency services be sentto your location. If the keys arelocked in the vehicle, call OnStar at1-888-4-ONSTAR to have a signalsent to unlock the doors. OnStarHands-Free Calling, including 30 trialminutes good for 60 days, isavailable on most vehicles. OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation service,with one trial route, is available onmost vehicles. Press the OnStarbutton to have an OnStar advisorcontact Roadside Service.

OnStar service is provided subjectto the OnStar Terms and Conditionsincluded in the OnStar Subscriberglove box literature.

Some services such as RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance may not beavailable until the owner of thevehicle registers with OnStar. Afterthe first prepaid year, contactOnStar to select a monthly or annualsubscription payment plan. If apayment plan is not selected, theOnStar system and all services,including airbag notificationand emergency services, may bedeactivated and no longer available.For more information visitwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), or pressthe OnStar button to speak withan advisor.

Not all OnStar services are availableon all vehicles. To check if thisvehicle is able to provide theservices described below, or for afull description of OnStar servicesand system limitations, see theOnStar Owner’s Guide in the glovebox or visit www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada),contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY1-877-248-2080, or press theOnStar button to speak with anOnStar advisor 24 hours a day,7 days a week.

OnStar Services Availablewith the Safe & Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of

Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic CrashNotification (AACN) (If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle LocationAssistance


• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email

• GM Goodwrench On DemandDiagnostics

• OnStar Hands-Free Callingwith 30 trial minutes

• OnStar Virtual Advisor(U.S. Only)

OnStar Services Included withDirections & Connections Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation(If equipped) or DrivingDirections - Advisor delivered

• RideAssist

• Information and ConvenienceServices

OnStar Hands-Free CallingOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowseligible OnStar subscribers tomake and receive calls using voicecommands. Hands-Free Callingis fully integrated into the vehicle,and can be used with OnStarPre-Paid Minute Packages. Mostvehicles include 30 trial minutesgood for 60 days. Hands-FreeCalling can also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan inthe U.S. or a Bell Mobility serviceplan in Canada, depending oneligibility. To find out more, refer tothe OnStar Owner’s Guide inthe vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca,or speak with an OnStar advisorby pressing the OnStar buttonor calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigationVehicles with the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation systemcan provide voice-guided drivingdirections. Press the OnStar buttonto have an OnStar advisor locate abusiness or address and downloaddriving directions to the vehicle.Voice-guided directions to thedesired destination will play throughthe audio system speakers. See theOnStar Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.

OnStar Virtual AdvisorOnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature ofOnStar Hands-Free Calling that usesminutes to access location-basedweather, local traffic reports, andstock quotes. Press the phone buttonand give a few simple voicecommands to browse through thevarious topics. See the OnStarOwner’s Guide for more information.This feature is only available in thecontinental U.S.


OnStar Steering WheelControlsThis vehicle may have a Talk/Mutebutton that can be used tointeract with OnStar Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering WheelControls on page 3-82 for moreinformation.

OnStar voice command does notwork unless Personal Callingis activated. To activate PersonalCalling, see the OnStar Owner’sGuide.

On some vehicles, the mute buttoncan be used to dial numbersinto voice mail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStarOwner’s Guide for moreinformation.

How OnStar Service WorksThe OnStar system can record andtransmit vehicle information. Thisinformation is automatically sent toan OnStar Call Center when theOnStar button is pressed, theemergency button is pressed, or ifthe airbags or AACN system deploy.This information usually includesthe vehicles GPS location and,in the event of a crash, additionalinformation regarding the crash thatthe vehicle was involved in (e.g.the direction from which the vehiclewas hit). When the Virtual Advisorfeature of OnStar Hands-FreeCalling is used, the vehicle alsosends OnStar the vehiclesGPS location so they can provideservices where it is located.

OnStar service cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area. OnStar service alsocannot work unless the vehicle is in

a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar has hired forthat area has coverage, networkcapacity and reception whenthe service is needed, andtechnology that is compatible withthe OnStar service. Not all servicesare available everywhere,particularly in remote or enclosedareas, or at all times.

Location information about thevehicle is only available if the GPSsatellite signals are unobstructedand available.

The vehicle must have a workingelectrical system, including adequatebattery power, for the OnStarequipment to operate. There areother problems OnStar cannotcontrol that may prevent OnStar fromproviding OnStar service at anyparticular time or place. Someexamples are damage to importantparts of the vehicle in a crash, hills,tall buildings, tunnels, weather orwireless phone network congestion.


Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar advisor cannot be heard.If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system may notbe functioning properly. Pressthe OnStar button and request avehicle diagnostic. If the lightappears clear (no light is appearing),your OnStar subscription hasexpired and all services have beendeactivated. Press the OnStarbutton to confirm that the OnStarequipment is active.

Universal HomeRemote SystemThe Universal Home RemoteSystem provides a way toreplace up to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmittersused to activate devices suchas garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.




This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:



Changes or modifications tothis system by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.


Universal Home RemoteSystem Operation

If there is one triangular LightEmitting Diode (LED) indicator lightabove the Universal HomeRemote buttons, follow theinstructions below.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activate devicessuch as garage door openers,security systems, and homeautomation devices.

Do not use the Universal HomeRemote with any garage dooropener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includesany garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Home Remote. Because ofthe steps involved, it may be helpfulto have another person available toassist you in the programming theUniversal Home Remote.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future UniversalHome Remote programming. It isalso recommended that uponthe sale of the vehicle, theprogrammed Universal HomeRemote buttons should be erasedfor security purposes. See “ErasingUniversal Home Remote Buttons”later in this section.

When programming a garage door,park outside of the garage. Parkdirectly in line with and facingthe garage door opener motor-heador gate motor-head. Be sure thatpeople and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate that is beingprogrammed.

It is recommended that a newbattery be installed in yourhand-held transmitter for quickerand more accurate transmission ofthe radio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalHome Remote SystemFor questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1-800-355-3515or go to homelink.com.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions,so read the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the devicewill time out and the procedure willhave to be repeated.


To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, pressand hold down the two outsidebuttons at the same time,releasing only when the UniversalHome Remote indicator lightbegins to flash, after 20 seconds.This step will erase the factorysettings or all previouslyprogrammed buttons.Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and donot repeat this step to programthe remaining two UniversalHome Remote buttons.

2. Hold the end of your hand-heldtransmitter about 1 to 3 inches(3 to 8 cm) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttonswhile keeping the indicator light inview. The hand-held transmitterwas supplied by the manufacturerof your garage door openerreceiver (motor head unit).

3. At the same time, press and holdboth the Universal Home Remotebutton to be used to control thegarage door and the hand-heldtransmitter button. Do not releasethe Universal Home Remotebutton or the hand-heldtransmitter button until Step 4has been completed.Some entry gates and garagedoor openers may requiresubstitution of Step 3 with theprocedure noted in “GateOperator and CanadianProgramming” later in thissection.

4. The indicator light on theUniversal Home Remotewill flash slowly at first and thenrapidly after Universal HomeRemote successfully receivesthe frequency signal fromthe hand-held transmitter.Release both buttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trainedUniversal Home Remote buttonand observe the indicator light.If the indicator light stays oncontinuously, the programming iscomplete and the garage doorshould move when the UniversalHome Remote button is pressedand released. There is no need tocontinue programming Steps 6through 8.If the Universal Home Remoteindicator light blinks rapidlyfor two seconds and then turnsto a constant light, continuewith the programming Steps 6through 8.


It may be helpful to have anotherperson assist with the remainingsteps.

6. After Steps 1 through 5 havebeen completed, locate insidethe garage the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit). Locate the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name andcolor of the button may varyby manufacturer.

7. Firmly press and release the“Learn” or “Smart” button.After you press this button,you will have 30 secondsto complete Step 8.

8. Immediately return to the vehicle.Firmly press and hold theUniversal Home Remote button,chosen in Step 3 to controlthe garage door, for two seconds,and then release it. If thegarage door does not move,press and hold the same buttona second time for two seconds,and then release it. Again, ifthe door does not move, pressand hold the same button athird time for two seconds, andthen release.The Universal Home Remoteshould now activate thegarage door.

To program the remainingtwo Universal Home Remotebuttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming the Universal HomeRemote System.” Do not repeatStep 1, as this will erase all previousprogramming from the UniversalHome Remote buttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingIf you have questions or needhelp programming the UniversalHome Remote System, call1-800-355-3515 or go tohomelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency lawsrequire transmitter signals to timeout or quit after several seconds oftransmission. This may not be longenough for Universal Home Remoteto pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similarly, some U.S.gate operators are manufactured totime out in the same manner.


If you live in Canada, or you arehaving difficulty programming a gateoperator or garage door openerby using the “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote”procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under“Programming Universal HomeRemote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold theUniversal Home Remote buttonwhile you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-heldtransmitter button until the frequencysignal has been successfullyaccepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal HomeRemote indicator light will flashslowly at first and then rapidly.

Proceed with Step 4 under“Programming Universal HomeRemote” to complete.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriateUniversal Home Remote button forat least half of a second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal HomeRemote ButtonsThe programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is soldor the lease ends.

To erase all programmed buttons onthe Universal Home Remote device:

1. Press and hold down thetwo outside buttons until theindicator light begins to flash,after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.


Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Home RemoteButtonTo reprogram any of the threeUniversal Home Remote buttons,repeat the programming instructionsearlier in this section, beginningwith Step 2.

For help or information on theUniversal Home Remote System,call the customer assistance phonenumber under Customer AssistanceOffices on page 7-5.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up on thelever. The glove box divider canbe removed. The slots on theleft side are for storing the divider.

CupholdersThere are cupholders located infront of and behind the centerconsole.

To access the cupholders behindthe center console, push the button.

Sunglasses StorageCompartmentYour vehicle may have a sunglassesstorage compartment located nearthe rearview mirror. Push thecover to open.

Center Console Storage

Your vehicle has a center consolewith an upper, lower and rearstorage area. To access the upperstorage area, lift up on the toplever. To access the lower storagearea, lift up on the bottom lever.


The top of the center console canextend forward. To adjust, holdthe top of the lever up and pull thetop of the center console forward.

To open the cover of the the rearstorage area, push the buttonlocated at the top.

Driver StorageCompartmentYour vehicle has a storage arealocated to left of the steering wheel.Pull down on the handle to access.

Rear Seat Armrest

To access the rear seat armrest, pullthe handle down. Lift the top of thearmrest to access the storage area.

Convenience NetUse the convenience net, located inthe rear, to store small loads asfar forward as possible. Thenet should not be used to storeheavy loads.

Cargo CoverFor vehicles with a cargo cover, useit to cover items in the rear of thevehicle.

To remove the cover and remove itfrom the vehicle, pull both endstoward each other. To reinstall,place each end of the cover in theholes behind the rear seat.


Cargo Tie DownsFour cargo tie-downs are located inthe rear compartment of thevehicle. The tie-downs can be usedto secure small loads.

Cargo ManagementSystemIf the vehicle has a cargomanagement system in the rear ofthe vehicle, it will have rails withadapters and hooks. These are usedto hold the net and mesh pocket.

The adapters are used to hold thenet. Slide the adapters to thedesired location on the upper andlower rail and turn the handleup to lock it in place. Compress therods of the net and insert theminto the corresponding openings ofthe adapter. The longer rod isfor the upper adapter.

The hooks hold the mesh pocket.To insert a hook on the rail,place the hook in the upper grooveof the rail and press it into thelower groove.


✍ NOTES


Instrument Panel

Instrument PanelOverviewInstrument PanelOverview ...........................3-4

Hazard Warning Flashers ...3-5Horn ...................................3-5Tilt Wheel ...........................3-6Turn Signal/MultifunctionLever ................................3-6

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals .............................3-6

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..........3-7

Flash-to-Pass ......................3-7Windshield Wipers ..............3-7Rainsense™ II Wipers ........3-8Windshield Washer .............3-8Rear Window Wiper/Washer .............................3-9

Cruise Control ....................3-9Exterior Lamps ..................3-12Wiper ActivatedHeadlamps ......................3-12

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) ..................3-13

Automatic HeadlampSystem ............................3-13

Instrument PanelBrightness .......................3-14

Dome Lamp ......................3-14Entry Lighting ....................3-14Reading Lamps .................3-14Electric PowerManagement ...................3-14

Battery Run-DownProtection ........................3-15

Accessory PowerOutlet(s) ..........................3-16

Climate ControlsAutomatic ClimateControl System ................3-17

Outlet Adjustment .............3-22

Warning Lights, Gages,and IndicatorsWarning Lights, Gages,and Indicators .................3-22

Instrument Panel Cluster ...3-23Speedometer andOdometer ........................3-24

Trip Odometer ..................3-24Tachometer .......................3-24Safety Belt Reminders ......3-24Airbag Readiness Light .....3-25Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator ..........................3-26

Charging System Light ......3-27Brake System WarningLight ................................3-27

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light .......3-28

StabiliTrak®/TractionControl System (TCS)Warning Light ..................3-28

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight ................................3-29

Instrument Panel 3-1

Tire Pressure Light ...........3-29MalfunctionIndicator Lamp ................3-30

Oil Pressure Light .............3-33Change Engine Oil Light ...3-33Security Light ....................3-33Cruise Control Light ..........3-33Highbeam On Light ...........3-34Low Washer FluidWarning Light ..................3-34

Fuel Gage ........................3-34Low Fuel Warning Light ....3-34Auto Stop Mode ................3-35Charge/Assist Gage ..........3-35Fuel Economy Light ..........3-35

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Driver InformationCenter (DIC) ...................3-36

DIC Operation andDisplays ..........................3-36

DIC Compass ...................3-40DIC Warnings andMessages ........................3-42

DIC VehicleCustomization ..................3-49

Audio System(s)Audio System(s) ................3-56Setting the Clock ..............3-56Radio(s) ............................3-58Using an MP3 ...................3-66XM Radio Messages .........3-71Bluetooth® ........................3-72Theft-Deterrent Feature .....3-82Audio Steering WheelControls ..........................3-82

Radio Reception ...............3-83Fixed Mast Antenna ..........3-84XM™ Satellite RadioAntenna System ..............3-84

Chime Level Adjustment ...3-84

3-2 Instrument Panel

✍ NOTES


Instrument Panel Overview


The main components of theinstrument panel are the following:A. Outlet Adjustment on

page 3-22.B. Instrument Panel Brightness on

page 3-14.C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

on page 3-6.D. Instrument Panel Cluster on

page 3-23.E. Windshield Wipers on page 3-7.F. Audio System(s) on page 3-56.G. Auxiliary Input Jack. See

Radio(s) on page 3-58.H. Exterior Lamps on page 3-12.I. Driver Information Center

(DIC) on page 3-36.J. Driver Storage Compartment on

page 2-38.K. Hood Release on page 5-9.L. Cruise Control on page 3-9.M. Tilt Wheel on page 3-6.N. Horn on page 3-5.

O. Audio Steering Wheel Controlson page 3-82.

P. Rear Window Wiper/Washer onpage 3-9.

Q. Traction Control System (TCS)on page 4-8

R. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission Operation onpage 2-20.

S. Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 3-17.

T. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 3-5.

U. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 3-26.

V. Safety Belt Reminders onpage 3-24.

W. Glove Box on page 2-37.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press this button located onthe instrument panel, to make thefront and rear turn signal lamps flashon and off. This warns others thatyou are having trouble.

Press | again to turn theflashers off.

HornPress near or on the horn symbolson the steering wheel pad tosound the horn.


Tilt WheelThe tilt lever lets the steering wheelbe adjusted.

The tilt lever is located on the leftside of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel, holdthe wheel and push the lever down.Then move the wheel to acomfortable position and pull thelever up firmly to lock the steeringcolumn in place.

Turn Signal/MultifunctionLever

The lever on the left side of thesteering column includes:

G : Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

Flash-to-Pass Feature.

Information for these features is onthe pages following.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash and thenrelease, to signal a lane change.The turn signal flashes automaticallythree times.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.


Have the bulbs replaced. If a bulb isnot burned out, check the fuse. SeeFuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 5-75 and for burned-out bulbs.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

23 Headlamp High/Low BeamChanger: Push the turnsignal/multifunction lever away fromyou to turn the high beams on.

Pull the lever towards you to returnto low beams.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster whenthe high beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use yourhigh-beam headlamps to signal adriver in front of you that you wantto pass.

To flash the high beamsfrom low beam, pull the turnsignal/multifunction lever all theway towards you. Then release it.

Windshield Wipers

The windshield wiper lever islocated on the right side of thesteering column.

Push up or pull down on the lever toplace it in one of the followingpositions.

8 (Mist): For a single wipingcycle. The lever returns to itsstarting position when released. Formore cycles, hold the lever downbefore releasing it.

9 (Off): Turns the wipers off.

& (Intermittent): Sets a delaybetween wipes. To set for a shorteror longer delay between wipes,move the switch on top of the leverleft or right to decrease orincrease wiper movement.

a (Low): For slow, steady wipingcycles.

1 (High): For rapid wiping cycles.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If thewiper blades are frozen to thewindshield, gently loosen or thawthem. If they become damaged,install new blades or blade inserts.See Windshield Wiper BladeReplacement on page 5-38.


Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. A circuit breaker willstop the motor until it cools down.

Rainsense™ II WipersFor vehicles with Rainsense™ IIwindshield wipers, the moisturesensor is located next to the insiderearview mirror and is mountedon the windshield. When active,these sensors are able to detectmoisture on the windshield andautomatically turn on the wipers.

To turn on the Rainsense feature,the wipers must be set to oneof the five delay settings on themultifunction lever. Each of the fivesettings adjusts the sensitivity ofthe sensor.

Since different drivers havedifferent setting preferences, it isrecommended that the mid-rangesetting (position 3) be used initially.For more wipes, select the highersettings; for fewer wipes, select thelower settings located closer to theoff position on the multifunction lever.

The sensor will automatically controlthe frequency of the wipes fromthe off setting to the high speedsetting according to the weatherconditions. The wipers can be left ina rainsense mode even when it isnot raining.

When Rainsense is active, theheadlamps will turn on automaticallyif the exterior lamp control is inthe AUTO position and the wipersare active.

Notice: Going through anautomatic car wash with thewipers on can damage them. Turnthe wipers off when goingthrough an automatic car wash.

Windshield Washer

{ CAUTION

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

Pull the windshield wiper levertoward you to spray washer fluid onthe windshield. The wipers will runfor a few cycles to clear thewindshield. For more wash cycles,pull the lever forward and hold.

Heated Windshield WasherNozzles

This feature prevents the windshieldwasher fluid from freezing on thenozzle during cold conditions.The heated nozzles are turned onwhen the rear window defoggeris activated. See Automatic ClimateControl System on page 3-17.


Rear WindowWiper/WasherThe rear wiper and rear washbutton is located on the instrumentpanel above the climate controlsystem.

= (Rear Wiper/Washer): Press towash and wipe the rear window.

The rear window washer usesthe same reservoir as the windshieldwasher. Check the windshieldwasher reservoir level if the frontwindshield can be worked, butno fluid is sprayed when the rearwasher is activated. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-24.

5 (Delay): Press to turn thedelayed wiping on or off.

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, the vehicle canmaintain a speed of about 25 mph(40 km/h) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator.Cruise control does not work atspeeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).

For vehicles with the StabiliTrak®

system that begins to limit wheelspin while you are using cruisecontrol, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 4-7.

{ CAUTION

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely at asteady speed. So, do not use thecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.


Setting Cruise Control

{ CAUTION

If you leave your cruise control onwhen you are not using cruise,you might hit a button and go intocruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruisecontrol switch off until you want touse cruise control.

The cruise control buttons arelocated on the left side of thesteering wheel.

E (On/Off): Press to turn the cruisecontrol system on and off. Anindicator light comes on.

RES+ (Resume/Accel): Move thethumbwheel up to resume a setspeed or to accelerate to a higherspeed.

−SET(Set/Coast): Move thethumbwheel down to set a speed orto decrease the speed.

To set a speed:

1. Press E to turn cruise control on.The indicator light on the buttoncomes on.

2. Get to the speed desired.

3. Press the thumbwheel toward−SET and release it.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

When the brakes are applied, thecruise control shuts off.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged. The indicator light onthe instrument panel cluster goesout when the cruise is no longerengaged. To return to the previouslyset speed, press the thumbwheel uptoward RES+ briefly when thevehicle has reached a speed ofabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.

This accelerates the vehicle to thepreviously selected speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

To increase the cruise speed whileusing cruise control:

• Press the thumbwheel up towardRES+ and hold it until the vehicleaccelerates to the desired speed,and then release the switch.


• To increase the speed in smallamounts, press the thumbwheelup toward RES+ briefly and thenrelease it. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1 mph(1.6 km/h) faster.

• Use the accelerator pedal toreach the desired speedand press the thumbwheeltowards −SET. The new desiredspeed must be greater thanthe previous set speed bytypically 5 mph.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready engaged,

• Push the thumbwheel toward−SET and hold until the desiredlower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

• To slow down in very smallamounts, push the thumbwheeltoward −SET briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle’s speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal,the vehicle will slow down tothe previously set cruise controlspeed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control works onhills depends upon the vehicle’sspeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steephills, you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle’s speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to maintainthe vehicle’s speed. For somevehicles the transmission mayautomatically downshift when goingdown hills to help maintain thevehicle’s speed. When the brakesare applied the cruise controlshuts off.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to disengagethe cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal orclutch; when cruise controldisengages, the indicator light onthe instrument panel clustergoes out.

• Press E to turn off the cruisecontrol system.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed memoryis erased when the cruise control orthe ignition is turned off.


Exterior Lamps

The exterior lamp control is locatedon the instrument panel to theleft of the steering wheel.

The exterior lamp control can beturned to the following positions:

9 (Off): Turns off the exteriorlamps. The knob returns tothe AUTO position after it isreleased.

AUTO (Automatic): Automaticallyturns the exterior lamps on andoff, depending on outside lighting.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps together with thefollowing:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

Lamps On Reminder

A warning chime sounds, if the driverdoor is opened while the ignition isoff and the lamps are on.

Wiper ActivatedHeadlampsThis feature automatically turnson the headlamps and parkinglamps if the exterior lamp control isset in the AUTO position and thewindshield wipers are turned on andhave completed eight wipe cycles.See Exterior Lamps on page 3-12for additional information.

When the ignition is turned off,the wiper-activated headlampsimmediately turn off. They also turnoff if the windshield wiper controlis turned off.


Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to seethe front of your vehicle during theday. Fully functional daytimerunning lamps are required on allvehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system makes thelow-beam headlamps come onin daylight when the followingconditions are met:

• The engine is running,

• The exterior lamp band is inAUTO, and

• The light sensor determines it isdaytime.

When the DRL are on, the low-beamheadlamps will be on. The taillamps,sidemarker, instrument panel lightsand other lamps will not be on.

When the exterior lamp band isturned to the headlamp position, theregular headlamps will come on. Theother lamps that come on with theheadlamps will also come on.

When the headlamps are turned off,the regular lamps also turn off, andthe low-beam headlamps turn on.

The regular headlamp systemshould be used when needed.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theheadlamps come on automatically.

There is a light sensor located on topof the instrument panel. Do not coverthe sensor or the headlamps willcome on when they are not needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.


Instrument PanelBrightnessThis feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel lights.

The thumbwheel for this feature islocated on the left side of thesteering wheel next to the exteriorlamps control.

Turn the thumbwheel to the right orleft to brighten or dim the lights.

Dome Lamp

* (Dome Lamp Override): Pressthis button to keep the domelamps and other interior lampsturned off while any door is open.Press this button again to return it tothe out position and the lampsautomatically come on when anydoor is opened.

+ (On/Off): Press this button toturn the dome lamps on and offwhile the doors are closed.

Entry LightingIf the dome lamp override button isin the out position, the lampsinside the vehicle automaticallycome on when any door is openedor when the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) unlock button ispressed. After the door is openedthe lights remain on and stay on for20 seconds after the doors areclosed, or until the key is put intothe ignition and turned to the

ACC/ACCESSORY position. Thelights will then gradually dim until itis no longer lit.

Reading LampsThe reading lamps are located onthe overhead console.

To turn the reading lamps on or off,press the button located next toeach lamp.

Electric PowerManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery’s temperature andstate of charge. It then adjusts thevoltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge islow, the voltage is raised slightly toquickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to preventovercharging. If the vehicle has avoltmeter gage or a voltage display


on the Driver Information Center(DIC), you may see the voltage moveup or down. This is normal. If there isa problem, an alert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads arevery high. This is true for allvehicles. This is because thegenerator (alternator) may not bespinning fast enough at idle toproduce all the power that is neededfor very high electrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator’s outputand the vehicle’s electrical needs. Itcan increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERYVOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If this message is displayed, it isrecommended that the driver reducethe electrical loads as much aspossible. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-42.

Battery Run-DownProtectionThe battery saver feature isdesigned to protect the vehicle’sbattery.

If any interior or exterior lamp is lefton and the ignition is turned off, thebattery rundown protection systemautomatically turns the lamp off after10 minutes.


Accessory PowerOutlet(s)The accessory power outlets can beused to connect electrical equipment,such as a cellular phone.

The accessory power outlets arelocated on the rear of the centerstorage console and in therear cargo compartment. There maybe a power outlet located insidethe instrument panel storagearea below the climate controls.

To use the outlets, remove the cover.When not in use, always cover theoutlet with the protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment on for extendedperiods will drain the battery.Always turn off electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain electrical accessories maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldresult in blown vehicle or adapterfuses. If you experience a problem,see your dealer/retailer foradditional information on theaccessory power outlet.

Notice: Adding any electricalequipment to your vehiclemay damage it or keep othercomponents from working as theyshould. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty.Check with your dealer/retailerbefore adding electricalequipment.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment.

Notice: Improper use of thepower outlet can cause damagenot covered by the warranty.Do not hang any type ofaccessory or accessory bracketfrom the plug because thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only.


Climate ControlsAutomatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Fan ControlB. Temperature ControlC. Air Delivery Mode ControlD. Normal Air Conditioning

E. Hybrid Air ConditioningF. RecirculationG. Rear Window Defogger

Climate Control Influence onHybrid Operation and FuelEconomy

To maximize your fuel economy, usethe following settings (as indicatedby the green marking):

• Set the fan knob to AUTO.

• Set the air delivery knobto AUTO.

• Select an air temperature settingnear 75°F (23°C).

• Select the Hybrid A/C button, ifA/C is required.

Avoid using these settings that maylead to fewer auto stops and tohigher fuel consumption:

• Manual fan speed operation.

• Defrost mode. Only use thissetting to clear the windows.

• Extreme cold or hot airtemperature settings, such as60°F (16°C) or 90°F (32°C).

• Normal air conditioning mode, ifA/C is required.


Automatic OperationThis climate control systemautomatically maintains the desiredtemperature inside the vehicle.

Do not cover the sensor located onthe top of the instrument panelnear the windshield or the sensorgrille below the climate controlfaceplate. These two sensors helpregulate the inside air temperature.

AUTO (Automatic Fan): Turnthe fan knob to AUTO for the systemto automatically adjust the fanspeed to reach the desired insidetemperature.

Temperature Control: Select thedesired air temperature between60-90°F (16-32°C). Typically,the best setting is near 75°F (23°C).Choosing the coldest or warmesttemperature setting does not causethe system to heat or cool anyfaster.

AUTO (Automatic Air DeliveryMode): Turn the air delivery modeknob to AUTO for the system toautomatically control the direction ofthe airflow to help reach thedesired inside temperature.

The system automatically controlsthe air inlet to supply the outside airor recirculated inside air neededto cool the vehicle faster. Theindicator light on the recirculationbutton will be lit whenever thesystem changes to recirculation.Press the recirculation buttonto change to outside air. However,the recirculation mode may turnback on automatically.

In cold weather, if the fan and airdelivery modes are in automatic, thesystem starts at lower fan speedsto avoid directing cold air intothe vehicle until warmer air isavailable. The climate controlsystem directs air to the floor, butmay automatically change modes asthe vehicle warms up to maintainthe chosen temperature setting.

The length of time needed to warmthe interior depends on theoutside temperature and insidetemperature of the vehicle.

Manual OperationIt is best to use the automaticsettings to maximize fuel economy.

A (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the fan speed. To turnthe fan off, turn the left knob tothe 9 position. In any setting otherthan off, the fan runs continuouslywith the ignition on. The fan must beturned on to run the air conditioningcompressor. There will be someairflow noticeable from the variousoutlets when driving, even withthe fan in the off position. This is toensure some fresh air is alwaysavailable in the vehicle. To turn offthe air completely, turn the fanto 9 and select the recirculationbutton.


Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature. Typically, the bestsetting is near 75°F (23°C).Choosing the coldest or warmesttemperature setting does not causethe system to heat or cool any faster.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwiseto change the direction of theairflow inside the vehicle.

Select from the following air deliverymodes:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andthe floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets with some air directed tothe windshield. When this mode isselected, the system turns therecirculation mode off. Recirculationmode cannot be selected whilein floor mode. This is to help preventwindow fogging.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Airis directed to the floor outlets, withsome air directed to the windshieldand side window outlets. In thismode, the system turns therecirculation mode off and runs theair conditioning compressorunless the outside air is at or belowfreezing. Recirculation modecannot be selected while in defogmode. This helps prevent windowfogging.

0 (Defrost): This mode removesfog or frost from the windshieldmore quickly. Air is directed to thewindshield, with some air directed tothe side window outlets and thefloor outlets. In this mode, thesystem turns the recirculation modeoff automatically and runs the airconditioning compressor unless theoutside air is at or below freezing.The recirculation mode cannotbe selected while in defrost mode.This helps prevent windowfogging and moisture building upinside the vehicle. In this mode, theclimate control system preventsall automatic engine start/stopoperations. This ensures the bestdefrost performance.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.


# (Normal Air Conditioning):Press to turn the air conditioningsystem on or off. An indicatorlight comes on to show that the airconditioning is on. Normal AirConditioning (A/C) can be selectedin any mode as long as the fanis on and the outside air temperatureis above freezing. Normal A/Ccannot be selected at the same timeas Hybrid Air Conditioning (A/C).A flashing indicator light indicatesthat the air conditioning compressoris currently not available.

When Normal A/C is selected, theclimate control system preventsall automatic engine start/stopoperations. This will ensure thecabin comfort is maintained.See “Air Conditioning and AutomaticEngine Start/Stop” later in thissection.

N (Hybrid Air Conditioning):Press to turn the Hybrid A/C systemon or off. An indicator light comeson to show that Hybrid A/C ison. Hybrid A/C can be selected in

any mode, except defrost as long asthe fan is on and the outside airtemperature is above freezing.Hybrid A/C cannot be selected atthe same time as the normalair conditioning. A flashing indicatorlight shows the air conditioningcompressor is not available.

The Hybrid A/C works to balancefuel economy and air conditioningcomfort. When Hybrid A/C is used inwarm weather, the vehicle getsbetter fuel economy by allowingmore frequent start/stops. Foradditional cooling, select NormalA/C. See “Air Conditioning andAutomatic Engine Start/Stop” later inthis section.

@ (Recirculation): Press totoggle between the recirculation andoutside air modes. The indicatorlight turns on when the recirculationmode is selected. This mode canbe used to prevent outside airand odors from entering the vehicleor to help cool the air inside thevehicle more quickly. Avoid using

the recirculation mode during highperiods of humidity and cool outsidetemperatures since this mayresult in increased window fogging.If window fogging is experienced,select the defrost mode.

Recirculation mode is not availablein floor, defog or defrost modes.If the button is selected inthese modes, the indicator will flash.This helps prevent window foggingand moisture building up insidethe vehicle.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

The rear window defogger will onlywork when the ignition is inON/RUN.

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to showthat it is activated.


The rear window defogger stays onfor about 10 minutes if the vehicleremains at slower vehicle speeds oruntil the button is pressed, orunless the ignition is turned toACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. Ifturned on again, the defoggeronly runs for about five minutesbefore turning off again. At highervehicle speeds, the defoggermay stay on continuously. Thedefogger can also be turned off byturning off the ignition.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you could cutor damage the warming grid, andthe repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.

Air Conditioning and EngineStart/StopOn hot days, use the automatic fanand automatic air delivery modesettings and the vehicle will reachthe desired temperature morequickly. The desired fan and airdelivery mode settings can still beadjusted manually. Open thewindows to let the hot inside airescape, then close them. This helpsreduce the time it takes for thevehicle to cool down and helps thesystem to operate more efficiently.

When either the Normal A/C orHybrid A/C modes are active, the airconditioning system removesmoisture from the air, so a smallamount of water may drip under thevehicle while idling or after turningoff the engine. This is normal.

The use of Normal A/C causes theengine to keep running whilethe vehicle is at a complete stop toallow the climate control systemto continue cooling.

The use of Hybrid A/C allowsautomatic engine start/stopoperations while the vehicle is at acomplete stop. The air conditioningcompressor can not run whenthe engine is not running, resultingin reduced cooling performance.The climate control systemmay keep the engine running orrestart the engine during a stop tocontinue cooling. Selecting theNormal A/C button forces the engineand air conditioning compressorto restart automatically. Formore information about EngineStart/Stop operation, see Startingthe Engine (Automatic EngineStart/Stop) on page 2-15.


Outlet AdjustmentUse the louvers located on the airoutlets to change the direction of theairflow.

Operation Tips

• Clear away any ice, snow, orleaves from the air inlets atthe base of the vehicle that mayblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

• Do not use any non-GMapproved hood deflectors thatcould adversely affect theperformance of the system.

• Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside ofthe vehicle more effectively.

Warning Lights,Gages, and IndicatorsWarning lights and gages cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gages couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when theremay be or is a problem with oneof the vehicle’s functions. Somewarning lights come on briefly whenthe engine is started to indicatethey are working.

Gages can indicate when there maybe or is a problem with one of thevehicle’s functions. Often gages andwarning lights work together toindicate a problem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gagesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual’s advice.Waiting to do repairs can becostly and even dangerous.


Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument panel cluster is designed to indicate how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle isgoing, about how much fuel the vehicle has left and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.

United States cluster, Canada similar


Speedometer andOdometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle’s speed in both milesper hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h).

The odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, ineither miles or kilometers.

If the vehicle needs a new odometerinstalled, the new one is set tothe mileage total of the oldodometer. If it cannot, it will be setat zero and a label must be puton the driver’s door to show the oldmileage reading when the newodometer was installed. If themileage is unknown, the labelshould then indicate that theprevious mileage is unknown.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer is located on theinstrument panel and shows howfar the vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.To reset the trip odometer to zero,press and hold the trip/resetbutton on the speedometer forabout two seconds. Press thetrip/reset button to switch betweenthe trip odometer and odometer.

Tachometer

The tachometer displays theengine speed in revolutionsper minute (rpm).

The auto stop indicator is located atthe bottom of the tachometer. Formore information see Auto StopMode on page 3-35.

Safety Belt RemindersDriver Safety Belt ReminderLightWhen the engine is started, a chimesounds for several seconds toremind the driver to fasten theirsafety belt, unless it is alreadybuckled.

The safety belt light comes on andstays on for several seconds,then flashes for several more.

This chime and light are repeated ifthe driver safety belt remainsunbuckled and the vehicle is inmotion. If the driver safety belt isalready buckled, neither thechime nor the light comes on.

U.S. shown, Canada similar


Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the engineis started, a chime sounds forseveral seconds to remind the frontpassenger to buckle their safety belt.This only occurs if the passengerairbag is enabled. See PassengerSensing System on page 1-49 formore information. The passengersafety belt light, located on theinstrument panel, comes on andstays on for several seconds andthen flashes for several more.

This chime and light are repeated ifthe passenger remains unbuckledand the vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled before the engine is started,neither the chime nor the lightcomes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop or otherelectronic device. To turn off thewarning light and or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light onthe instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag’selectrical system for malfunctions.The light indicates if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor,the pretensioners, the airbagmodules, the wiring and the crashsensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System onpage 1-41.

{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

The airbag readiness light comes onwhen the vehicle is started, andflashes for a few seconds. The lightgoes out when the system is ready.


If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away.

The airbag readiness light shouldflash for a few seconds whenthe engine is started. If the lightdoes not come on then, have it fixedimmediately. If there is a problemwith the airbag system, anairbag Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-42 for more information.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 1-49for important safety information. Theinstrument panel has a passengerairbag status indicator.

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,

or either the on or off symbol to letyou know the status of the rightfront passenger frontal andseat-mounted side impact airbags.

If the word ON or the on symbolis lit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag areenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator,it means that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or ifthere are no lights at all, there maybe a problem with the lights orthe passenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

United States

Canada


{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 3-25 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light isworking. It should go out when theengine is started.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there could be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer/retailer. Driving while this lightis on could drain the battery.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as theradio and air conditioner.

Brake System WarningLight

The brake indicator light shouldcome on briefly as the engineis started. If it does not come onhave the vehicle serviced byyour dealer/retailer.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light comes onwhen the parking brake is set. The

light stays on if the parking brakedoes not fully release. If it stays onafter the parking brake is fullyreleased, there is a brake problem.Have the brake system inspectedimmediately.

{ CAUTION

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on. Drivingwith the brake system warninglight on can lead to a crash. If thelight is still on after the vehiclehas been pulled off the road andcarefully stopped, have thevehicle towed for service.

If the light comes on while driving, achime sounds. Pull off the road andstop. The pedal might be harder topush or go closer to the floor. It mightalso take longer to stop. If the light isstill on, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing Your Vehicle onpage 4-22.

United States Canada


Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light shouldcome on briefly as the engineis started. If it does not come onhave the vehicle serviced byyour dealer/retailer.

If the ABS light stays on longer thana few seconds after engine isstarted, or comes on and stays onwhile driving, try resetting thesystem. To reset the system:

1. While driving, pull over when it issafe to do so.

2. Place the vehicle in P (PARK).

3. Turn off the ignition.

4. Then restart the engine.

If the ABS light remains on afterresetting the system or comeson again while driving, the vehicleneeds service. If the ABS light is on,but the regular brake systemwarning light is not on, the antilockbrakes are not working properly,but the regular brakes are stillfunctioning. Have the vehicleserviced right away. If both brakelights are on, the vehicle doesnot have antilock brakes, and thereis a problem with the regularbrakes as well. Have the vehicletowed for service. See Towing YourVehicle on page 4-22.

StabiliTrak®/TractionControl System (TCS)Warning Light

The Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® system warninglight comes on briefly as theengine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer. Ifthe system is working normallythe indicator lights go off.

This light flashes while the TractionControl System (TCS) and/or theStabiliTrak system are working.It also flashes when the AntilockBrake System (ABS) is activated.

If the light comes on and stayson while driving there is a problemwith the Traction Control System(TCS) or the StabiliTrak system. The


TCS and/or StabiliTrak systemautomatically turns off and vehicleneeds service.

When this light is on, the TCSsystem does not limit wheel spinand/or the StabiliTrak system doesnot assist with vehicle control.

When the Traction Control systemand/or StabiliTrak system are turnedoff, the light comes on.

When the Traction Control Systemand/or StabiliTrak system areturned on, the light turns off.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 4-8 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 4-7 for moreinformation.

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLightThe engine coolant temperaturelight should come on briefly as theengine is started. If it does notcome on have the vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer.

Notice: Driving with the enginecoolant temperature warning lighton could cause the vehicle tooverheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 5-23. The vehicle’sengine could be damaged, and itmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Never drive withthe engine coolant temperaturewarning light on.

If this light comes on and stays on,the engine has overheated. Pullover and see Engine Overheating onpage 5-23 for more information.

Tire Pressure Light

If the vehicle has a tire pressuremonitoring system, the tire pressurelight should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer/retailer. It providesinformation about tire pressures andthe Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem.

When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message in theDriver Information Center (DIC), canaccompany the light. See DIC


Warnings and Messages onpage 3-42 for more information.Stop and check the tires as soon asit is safe to do so. If underinflated,inflate to the proper pressure.See Tires on page 5-38 for moreinformation.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there could be aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System. The light flashesfor about a minute and stayson steady for the remainder of theignition cycle. This sequencerepeats with every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 5-45 for more information.

MalfunctionIndicator LampCheck Engine LightA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It ensuresthat emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle,helping to produce a cleanerenvironment.

This light comes on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show itis working. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer.

If the check engine light comes onand stays on, while the engineis running, this indicates that thereis an OBD II problem and serviceis required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problemis apparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This systemassists the service technician incorrectly diagnosing anymalfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, after a while, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle’s fuel economymight not be as good, and theengine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.


Notice: Modifications made tothe engine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than thoseof the same Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) can affect thevehicle’s emission controls andcan cause this light to come on.Modifications to these systemscould lead to costly repairs notcovered by the vehicle warranty.This could also result in a failureto pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 5-3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

The following can prevent moreserious damage to the vehicle:

• Reduce vehicle speed.

• Avoid hard accelerations.

• Avoid steep uphill grades.

• If towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauledas soon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop thevehicle. Find a safe place to parkthe vehicle. Turn the key off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps andsee your dealer/retailer for serviceas soon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction has beendetected on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

An emission system malfunctionmight be corrected by:

• Make sure the fuel cap is fullyinstalled. See Filling the Tankon page 5-7. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuelto evaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turnthe light off.

• If the vehicle has been driventhrough a deep puddle ofwater, the vehicle’s electricalsystem might be wet. Thecondition is usually correctedwhen the electrical system driesout. A few driving trips shouldturn the light off.


• Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuelquality causes the engine not torun as efficiently as designedand may cause: stallingafter start-up, stalling when thevehicle is changed into gear,misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling onacceleration. These conditionsmight go away once the engine iswarmed up.If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brandused. It will require at leastone full tank of the proper fuel toturn the light off.See Gasoline Octane onpage 5-5.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer/retailer cancheck the vehicle. The dealer/retailerhas the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanicalor electrical problems that mighthave developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and localgovernments have or might beginprograms to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on the vehicle.Failure to pass this inspection couldprevent getting a vehicleregistration.

Here are some things to know tohelp the vehicle pass an inspection:

• The vehicle will not pass thisinspection if the check enginelight is on with the enginerunning, or if the key is inON/RUN and the light is not on.

• The vehicle will not pass thisinspection if the OBD II(on-board diagnostic) systemdetermines that critical emissioncontrol systems have notbeen completely diagnosed bythe system. The vehicle would beconsidered not ready forinspection. This can happen ifthe battery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery has rundown. The diagnostic systemis designed to evaluate criticalemission control systemsduring normal driving. This cantake several days of routinedriving. If this has been done andthe vehicle still does not passthe inspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, yourdealer/retailer can prepare thevehicle for inspection.


Oil Pressure Light

{ CAUTION

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer.

If the light comes on and stays on,it means that oil is not flowingthrough the engine properly. Thevehicle could be low on oil andmight have some other systemproblem.

Change Engine Oil Light

Change engine oil light means thatservice is required on the vehicle.

See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-3 and Engine Oil onpage 5-11 for more information.

After the engine oil is changed theengine oil life system needs tobe reset in order to turn off this light.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 5-14 for more information.

Security Light

For information regarding this lightand the vehicle’s security system,see PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizer on page 2-12.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light comes onwhenever the cruise control is set.

The light goes out when thecruise control is turned off. SeeCruise Control on page 3-9 for moreinformation.


Highbeam On Light

The highbeam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 3-7 for moreinformation.

Low Washer FluidWarning Light

The low washer fluid warning lightcomes on when the windshieldwasher fluid is low. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-24 formore information.

Fuel Gage

When the ignition is on, the fuelgage shows about how much fuel isin the fuel tank.

An arrow on the fuel gage indicatesthe side of the vehicle the fueldoor is on.

When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light comes on. There stillis a little fuel left, but the fueltank should be refueled soon. SeeLow Fuel Warning Light onpage 3-34 for more information.

Four things that can happen but donot mean the fuel gage is notfunctioning properly are:

• At the service station, the fuelpump shuts off before thegage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the fuel gageindicates.

• The gage moves a little whileturning a corner or accelerating.

• The gage takes a few seconds tostabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes backto empty after the ignition isturned off.

For the fuel tank capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 5-81.

Low Fuel Warning Light

The low fuel warning light, belowthe fuel gage, comes on briefly whenthe engine is started.



This light also comes on when thefuel tank is low on fuel. When fuel isadded, the light should go off. If itdoes not, have the vehicle serviced.

Auto Stop Mode

This mark on the tachometersignifies that the engine is in AutoStop mode which is a fuel savingoperation.

When the vehicle is off, thetachometer needle moves to OFF. Ifthe driver’s door is opened whilein Auto Stop, a chime sounds.

Charge/Assist Gage

The CHARGE/ASSIST gagedisplays the charge into and out ofthe hybrid battery.

When the gage indicates ASSIST,the electric motor is performingan automatic restart of the engine,or the electric motor is assistingfor maximum acceleration.

When the gage indicates CHARGE,the electric motor operates as agenerator to perform regenerativebraking, while decelerating. SeeRegenerative Braking on page 2-23for more information.

The gage also indicates CHARGEwhen the system is rechargingthe hybrid battery.

If the hybrid battery or other hybridcomponents are very hot or cold, theCHARGE and ASSIST functions canbe suspended until the componenttemperatures are normal.

Fuel Economy Light

The ECO light comes on when thevehicle is achieving fuel economyclose to its rated performance.

Driving habits that improvefuel economy increases the timethat the fuel economy light is on.

To enable or disable the fueleconomy light, while in park, pressthe Vehicle Info button on theDIC until PRESS V TO SET ECO isdisplayed. Then press the set/resetbutton to select off or on. Formore information see Trip Odometeron page 3-24 and DIC Operationand Displays on page 3-36.



Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Your vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC).

All information appears in the DICdisplay located in the instrumentpanel cluster.

The DIC comes on when theignition is on. After a short delay,the DIC displays the information thatwas last displayed before theengine was turned off.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

The DIC also displays the compassdirection, outside air temperature,and shift position indicator at the topof the DIC display. If there is aproblem with the system that controlsthe temperature display, thenumbers will be replaced withdashes. If this occurs, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer/

retailer. If an abnormal temperaturereading is displayed for anextended period of time, consultyour dealer/retailer. Under certaincircumstances, especially when theengine is idling, a delay updating thetemperature display is normal.

See DIC Compass on page 3-40and Automatic TransmissionOperation on page 2-20 for moreinformation.

DIC Operation andDisplaysThe DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons located on theinstrument panel, below theheadlamp switch.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

The DIC also allows some featuresto be customized. See DIC VehicleCustomization on page 3-49 for moreinformation.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicleinformation, customization, andset/reset buttons. The buttonfunctions are detailed in thefollowing pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto display the odometer, tripodometer, fuel range, averageeconomy, and instantaneouseconomy. The compass and outsidetemperature will also be shown inthe display. The temperature will beshown in °F or °C depending onthe units selected.


T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to display the oil life,units, tire pressure readingsfor vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterprogramming, economy light on/off,compass zone setting, andcompass recalibration on vehicleswith this feature.

U (Customization): Press thisbutton to customize the featuresettings on your vehicle. See DICVehicle Customization on page 3-49for more information.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button toset or reset certain functions andto turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto scroll through the followingmenu items:

Odometer

Press the trip/fuel button untilODOMETER displays. This displayshows the distance the vehiclehas been driven in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km). Pressing thetrip odometer reset stem willalso display the odometer.

To switch between English andmetric measurements, see “Units”later in this section.

Trip Odometer

Press the trip/fuel button until TRIPdisplays. This display shows thecurrent distance traveled ineither miles (mi) or kilometers (km)since the last reset for the tripodometer. Pressing the tripodometer reset stem will alsodisplay the trip odometer.

The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing the set/reset buttonwhile the trip odometer is displayed.You can also reset the tripodometer while it is displayed bypressing and holding the tripodometer reset stem.

Fuel Range

Press the trip/fuel button untilFUEL RANGE displays. Thisdisplay shows the approximatenumber of remaining miles (mi) orkilometers (km) the vehicle can bedriven without refueling. The displaywill show LOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the vehicle’s fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remainingin the fuel tank. This estimatewill change if driving conditionschange. For example, if driving intraffic and making frequentstops, this display may read onenumber, but if the vehicle is drivenon a freeway, the number maychange even though the same


amount of fuel is in the fuel tank.This is because different drivingconditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fueleconomy than city driving. Fuelrange cannot be reset.

If the vehicle is low on fuel, theFUEL LEVEL LOW message will bedisplayed. See “FUEL LEVELLOW” under DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-42.

Average Fuel Economy

Press the trip/fuel button untilAVERAGE FUEL ECONOMYdisplays. This display shows theapproximate average miles pergallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of mpg (L/100 km)recorded since the last time thismenu item was reset. To reset theAVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY,press and hold the set/reset button.The display will show zero.

Instantaneous Fuel Economy

If the vehicle has this display, pressthe trip/fuel button until INSTANTFUEL ECONOMY displays.This display shows the current fueleconomy at a particular momentand will change frequently as drivingconditions change. This displayshows the instantaneous fueleconomy in miles per gallon (mpg)or liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km). Unlike average fueleconomy, this display cannotbe reset.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

Oil Life

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplays. This display shows anestimate of the oil’s remaining usefullife. If you see 99% OIL LIFEREMAINING on the display, thatmeans 99% of the current oillife remains. The engine oil lifesystem will alert you to change theoil on a schedule consistent withyour driving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message will appear on thedisplay. See “CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON” under DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-42.You should change the oil as soonas you can. See Engine Oil onpage 5-11. In addition to the engine


oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 6-3for more information.

Units

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil UNITS displays. This displayallows you to select between Englishor Metric units of measurement.Once in this display, press theset/reset button to select betweenENGLISH or METRIC units. Allof the vehicle information will thenbe displayed in the unit ofmeasurement selected.

Tire Pressure

If your vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure willbe shown in either pounds persquare inch (psi) or kilopascals(kPa). Press the vehicle informationbutton until the DIC displays

FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##RIGHT ##. Press the vehicleinformation button again until theDIC displays REAR TIRES PSI(kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low or high tire pressurecondition is detected by the systemwhile driving, a message advisingyou to check the pressure in aspecific tire will appear in thedisplay. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-43 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-42for more information.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with your vehicle.If this consistently occurs, seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

Relearn Remote Key

This display allows you to matchRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters to your vehicle. Tomatch an RKE transmitter to yourvehicle:

1. Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TORELEARN REMOTE KEYdisplays.

2. Press the set/reset button untilREMOTE KEY LEARNINGACTIVE is displayed.

3. Press and hold the lock andunlock buttons on the firsttransmitter at the same time forabout 15 seconds.A chime will sound indicatingthat the transmitter is matchedand REMOTE KEY LEARNINGCOMPLETE will be shownon the display.


4. To match additional transmittersat this time, repeat Step 3.Each vehicle can have amaximum of eight transmittersmatched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode,you must cycle the key toLOCK/OFF.

Compass Zone Setting

This display allows for setting thecompass zone. See DIC Compasson page 3-40 for more information.

Compass Recalibration

This display allows for calibratingthe compass. See DIC Compass onpage 3-40 for more information.

ECO (Economy) Light On/Off

This display allows you to turn theECO light in the cluster on andoff. See Fuel Economy Lighton page 3-35 for more information.Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V SET ECOdisplays. This display will only

be available when the vehicle is inP (Park). Once in the display,press the set/reset button to selectON or OFF.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

DIC CompassYour vehicle may have acompass in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

Compass Zone

The zone is set to zone eight uponleaving the factory. Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone foryour location.

Under certain circumstances, suchas during a long distancecross-country trip or moving to anew state or province, it willbe necessary to compensate forcompass variance by resetting thezone through the DIC if the zoneis not set correctly.

Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth’s magneticnorth and true geographic north. Ifthe compass is not set to thezone where you live, the compassmay give false readings. Thecompass must be set to the variancezone in which the vehicle istraveling.

To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving.Only set it when the vehicle is inP (Park).Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TO SETCOMPASS ZONE: ## displays.


2. Find the vehicle’s currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

3. Press and hold the set/resetbutton to scroll through andselect the appropriatevariance zone.

4. Press the trip/fuel button until thevehicle heading, for example,N for North, is displayed inthe DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass. See“Compass Calibration Procedure”following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger. Itis suggested to calibrate awayfrom tall buildings, utility wires,manhole covers, or other industrialstructures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.

If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N forNorth, or the heading does notchange after making turns, theremay be a strong magnetic fieldinterfering with the compass. Suchinterference may be caused bya magnetic CB or cell phone

antenna mount, a magneticemergency light, magnetic note padholder, or any other magneticitem. Turn off the vehicle, move themagnetic item, then turn on thevehicle and calibrate the compass.

To calibrate the compass, usethe following procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass is setto the variance zone in which thevehicle is located. See“Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in this section.Do not operate any switchessuch as window, sunroof, climatecontrols, seats, etc. during thecalibration procedure.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPAS(Compass) displays.


3. Press the set/reset button to startthe compass calibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING COMPASS:TURN IN CIRCLES. Drive thevehicle in tight circles at less than5 mph (8 km/h) to complete thecalibration. The DIC will displayCOMPASS CALIBRATIONCOMPLETE for a few secondswhen the calibration is complete.The DIC display will then return tothe previous menu.

DIC Warnings andMessagesMessages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the statusof the vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed bythe driver to correct the condition.Multiple messages may appear oneafter another.

Some messages may not requireimmediate action, but you can pressany of the DIC buttons, or the tripodometer reset stem on the

instrument panel cluster toacknowledge that you received themessages and to clear themfrom the display.

Some messages cannot be clearedfrom the DIC display because theyare more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can becleared. Take any messages thatappear on the display seriously andremember that clearing themessages will only make themessages disappear, not correct theproblem.

The following are the possiblemessages that can be displayedand some information about them.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays whenthe charging system detects that thebattery is being drained. You maynotice that the vehicle attemptsto reduce the drain for you byturning off accessories, such asinterior fans, rear defogger,and heated seats. Turn off all

accessories. If the vehicle is notrunning, start and run the engine forat least 10 minutes to allow thebattery to recharge. If the engine isrunning and the condition persists,see your dealer/retailer immediately.

CALIBRATING COMPASS:TURN IN CIRCLESThis message displays whencalibrating the compass. Drive thevehicle in circles at less than5 mph (8 km/h) to complete thecalibration. See DIC Compass onpage 3-40.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONThis message displays when serviceis required for the vehicle. Seeyour dealer/retailer. See Engine Oilon page 5-11 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-3 for moreinformation.


Acknowledging this message willnot reset the OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplay. That must be done atthe OIL LIFE screen. See “OIL LIFE”under DIC Operation and Displayson page 3-36 and Engine OilLife System on page 5-14 for moreinformation.

CHANGE TRANSMISSIONFLUID

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluid maydamage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle’s warranty. Alwaysuse the automatic transmissionfluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 6-11.

This message displays when the lifeof the transmission fluid hasexpired and it should be changed.See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-3 and RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-11for the proper fluid and changeintervals.

CHECK TIRE PRESSUREOn vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle’s tires needs to be checked.This message also displays LEFTFRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFTREAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicatewhich tire needs to be checked.You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. Toread the other messages that mayhave been sent at the sametime, press the set/reset button. If atire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon asyou can. Have the tire pressureschecked and set to those shown onthe Tire Loading Informationlabel. See Tires on page 5-38,Loading the Vehicle on page 4-18,and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-43. The DIC also shows thetire pressure values. See DICOperation and Displays onpage 3-36. If the tire pressure is

low, the low tire pressure warninglight comes on. See Tire PressureLight on page 3-29.

COMPASS CALIBRATIONCOMPLETEThis message displays when thecompass calibration is complete.See DIC Compass on page 3-40.

CRUISE CONTROL SETTO XXXThis message displays wheneverthe cruise control is set. See CruiseControl on page 3-9 for moreinformation.

DRIVER DOOR OPENThis message displays when thedriver door is not closed properly.Close the door completely.


ENGINE HOT A/C(Air Conditioning) OFFThis message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor is automatically turnedoff. When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the A/C operationautomatically resumes. You cancontinue to drive your vehicle.

ENGINE OIL LOW: ADD OILYour vehicle may have an engine oillevel sensor. If it does, thismessage displays when the oil islow. See Engine Oil on page 5-11for more information.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage may occur.If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster

and/or DIC, stop the vehicle assoon as possible. Do not increasethe engine speed above normalidling speed. See EngineOverheating on page 5-23 formore information.

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature istoo hot. Stop and allow the vehicleto idle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage may occur.If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel clusterand/or DIC, stop the vehicleas soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 5-23 formore information.

This message displays along with acontinuous chime when theengine has overheated. Stop and

turn the engine off immediately toavoid severe engine damage.See Engine Overheating onpage 5-23.

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDThis message displays when thevehicle’s engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affect thevehicle’s ability to accelerate. If thismessage is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceed toyour destination. The performancemay be reduced the next time thevehicle is driven. The vehicle may bedriven at a reduced speed while thismessage is on, but acceleration andspeed may be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer/retailer for service as soon aspossible.


FUEL LEVEL LOWThis message displays when yourvehicle is low on fuel. Refill thefuel tank as soon as possible. SeeFuel Gage on page 3-34 andFilling the Tank on page 5-7 formore information.

HOOD OPENThis message displays on somevehicles when the hood is not closedproperly. Close the hood completely.See Hood Release on page 5-9.

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CAREThis message displays when theoutside air temperature is coldenough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

LIFTGATE OPENThis message displays when theliftgate is not closed completely.Close the liftgate completely. SeeLiftgate on page 2-8.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine oil pressureis low, severe engine damagemay occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), stop thevehicle as soon as possible.Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressureis corrected. See Engine Oil onpage 5-11 for more information.

This message displays whenthe vehicle’s engine oil pressure islow. The oil pressure light alsoappears on the instrument panelcluster. See Oil Pressure Lighton page 3-33.

Stop the vehicle immediately, asengine damage can result fromdriving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer as soon aspossible when this message isdisplayed.

PASSENGER DOOR OPENThis message displays when one ormore of the passenger doors arenot closed properly. Close the doorscompletely.

REMOTE KEY LEARNINGACTIVEThis message displays whilematching a Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.See “MATCHING TRANSMITTERSTO YOUR VEHICLE” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-4 andDIC Operation and Displays onpage 3-36 for more information.


REMOTE KEY LEARNINGCOMPLETEThis message displays whilematching a Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.See “MATCHING TRANSMITTERSTO YOUR VEHICLE” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-4 andDIC Operation and Displays onpage 3-36 for more information.

REPLACE REMOTE KEY FOBBATTERYThis message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbattery is low. The battery needs tobe replaced in the transmitter.See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-4.

SERVICE A/C(Air Conditioning) SYSTEMThis message displays when thereis a problem detected in the airconditioning system. Have thevehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer.

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays when thereis a problem with the airbagsystem. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer immediately.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 3-25 for more information.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMThis message displays along withthe brake system warning lightif there is a problem with the brakesystem or when the brake fluidlevel is low. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 3-27. Havethe brake system serviced byyour dealer/retailer as soon aspossible.

SERVICE HILL START ASSISTThis message displays if there isa problem with the hill startassist function. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE HYBRID SYSTEMThis message displays if the hybridcomponents need to be serviced.Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer.

SERVICE POWER STEERINGThis message displays if therehas been a problem detected withthe power steering. See Steering onpage 4-9 for more information.


SERVICE STABILITRAKThis message displays if there hasbeen a problem detected withStabiliTrak®. A warning light alsoappears on the instrumentpanel cluster. See StabiliTrak®/Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light on page 3-28. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 4-7 formore information.

If this message turns on while youare driving, pull off the road as soonas possible and stop carefully.Try resetting the system by turningthe ignition off and then backon. If this message still stays on orturns back on again while youare driving, your vehicle needsservice. Have the system inspectedby your dealer/retailer as soonas possible.

SERVICE TIRE MONITORINGSYSTEMOn vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on theTPMS is not working properly.The tire pressure light also flashesand then remains on during thesame ignition cycle. See TirePressure Light on page 3-29.Several conditions may cause thismessage to appear. See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 5-46 for more information. Ifthe warning comes on and stays on,there may be a problem with theTPMS. See your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROLThis message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS)is not functioning properly. Awarning light also appears on theinstrument panel cluster. SeeStabiliTrak®/Traction Control System(TCS) Warning Light on page 3-28and Traction Control System

(TCS) on page 4-8 for moreinformation. Have the TCS servicedby your dealer/retailer as soonas possible.

SERVICE TRANSMISSIONThis message displays when thereis a problem with the transmission.See your dealer/retailer forservice.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message displays whena non-emissions related malfunctionoccurs. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer as soonas possible.

SPEED LIMITED TOXXX MPH (KM/H)This message displays when yourvehicle speed is limited to 80 mph(128 km/h) because the vehicledetects a problem in the speedvariable assist steering system.Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer.


STABILITRAK NOT READYIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage may display and theStabiliTrak indicator light on theinstrument panel cluster may be onafter first driving the vehicle andexceeding 20 mph (32 km/h)for 30 seconds. The StabiliTraksystem is not functional until the lighthas turned off. See StabiliTrak®


STABILITRAK OFFIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when youturn off the StabiliTrak, or when thestability control has beenautomatically disabled. To limitwheel spin and realize the fullbenefits of the stability enhancementsystem, you should normallyleave StabiliTrak on. However, youshould turn StabiliTrak off if yourvehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice,or snow and you want to rockyour vehicle to attempt to free it, orif you are driving in extreme

off-road conditions and require morewheel spin. See If Your Vehicle isStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow onpage 4-17. To turn the StabiliTraksystem on or off, see StabiliTrak®

System on page 4-7.

TIGHTEN GAS CAPThis message may display alongwith the check engine light onthe instrument panel cluster if thevehicle’s fuel cap is not tightenedproperly. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 3-30. Reinstallthe fuel cap fully. See Filling theTank on page 5-7. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuelcap allows fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installedshould turn this light andmessage off.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEOn vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the TPMSis re-learning the tire positionson your vehicle. The tire positionsmust be re-learned after rotating thetires or after replacing a tire orsensor. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on page 5-50, TirePressure Monitor System onpage 5-45, and Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43 for moreinformation.

TRACTION CONTROL OFFThis message displays whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)turns off. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 4-8 for moreinformation.

This message only displays whilethe ignition is in ON/RUN anddisappears after 10 seconds, unlessit is acknowledged or an urgentwarning appears.


Any of the following conditions maycause the TCS to turn off:

• The TCS is turned off by pressingthe TCS/StabiliTrak button. SeeStabiliTrak® System onpage 4-7 for more information.

• The battery is low.

• There is a TCS failure. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

TRACTION CONTROL ONThis message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) turnson. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 4-7 for more information.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the transmission fluid isoverheating and the transmissiontemperature warning is displayedon the instrument panel clusterand/or DIC, you can damagethe transmission. This could leadto costly repairs that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Do not drive your vehicle withoverheated transmission fluid orwhile the transmissiontemperature warning is displayed.

This message displays along witha chime if the transmission fluidin the vehicle gets hot. Driving withthe transmission fluid temperaturehigh can cause damage to thevehicle. Stop the vehicle and let itidle to allow the transmission to cool.This message clears and thechime stops when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays and a chimesounds as a reminder to turn offthe turn signal if you drive yourvehicle for more than about 3/4 mile(1.2 km) with a turn signal on.See Turn and Lane-Change Signalson page 3-6 for more information.

DIC VehicleCustomizationYour vehicle may have customizationcapabilities that allow you to programcertain features to one preferredsetting. Customization features canonly be programmed to one settingon the vehicle and cannot beprogrammed to a preferred settingfor two different drivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on your vehicle.Only the options available willbe displayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen your vehicle left the factory,but may have been changedfrom their default state since then.

The customization preferencesare automatically recalled.


To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the FeatureSettings Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place

the vehicle in P (Park).To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.

2. Press the customization button toscroll through the availablecustomizable options.

Feature Settings Menu ItemsThe following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than Englishhas been set. This feature allowsyou to change the language in whichthe DIC messages appear toEnglish.

Press the customization button untilthe PRESS V TO DISPLAY INENGLISH screen appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to display all DICmessages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to select thelanguage in which the DICmessages will appear.

Press the customization button untilthe PRESS V TO SET DISPLAYLANGUAGE screen appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.

FRANCAIS: All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages willappear in Spanish.

NO CHANGE: No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press theset/reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhen the vehicle’s doors willautomatically lock. See AutomaticDoor Lock on page 2-7 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET AUTO DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button onceto access the settings for thisfeature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):The doors will automaticallylock when the vehicle is shifted outof P (Park).


AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 8 mph(13 km/h) for three seconds.



AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature. Italso allows you to select whichdoors and when the doors willautomatically unlock. See AutomaticDoor Unlock on page 2-7 formore information.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings forthis feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER DOOR AT KEY OUT: Onlythe driver’s door will unlock whenthe key is taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER DOOR IN PARK: Onlythe driver’s door will unlockwhen the vehicle is shifted intoP (Park).

ALL DOORS AT KEY OUT: All ofthe doors will unlock when thekey is taken out of the ignition.

ALL DOORS IN PARK (default):All of the doors will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into P (Park).



REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle withthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-4 for more information.


Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET REMOTEDOOR LOCK appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

VERIFICATION OFF: There will beno feedback when you press thelock button on the RKE transmitter.

VERIFICATION LIGHTS ONLY:The exterior lamps will flashwhen you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter.

VERIFICATION HORN ONLY: Thehorn will sound on the secondpress of the lock button on the RKEtransmitter.

VERIFICATION HORN & LIGHTS(default): The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter,and the horn will sound when thelock button is pressed againwithin five seconds of the previouscommand.

VERIFICATION NO CHANGE: Nochange will be made to thisfeature. The current setting willremain.


REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if thedoors are open. See Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-4 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET REMOTEDOOR UNLOCK appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

VERIF LIGHTS OFF: The exteriorlamps will not flash when youpress the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.

VERIF LIGHTS ON (default): Theexterior lamps will flash whenyou press the unlock button on theRKE transmitter.


VERIF NO CHANGE: No changewill be made to this feature.The current setting will remain.


DELAY DOOR LOCK

On vehicles with a crew cab, thisfeature allows you to select whetheror not the locking of the vehicle’sdoors will be delayed. When lockingthe doors with the power doorlock switch and a door is open, thisfeature will delay locking thedoors until five seconds after thelast door is closed. You willhear three chimes to signal that thedelayed locking feature is in use.The key must be out of the ignitionfor this feature to work. You cantemporarily override delayed lockingby pressing the power door lockswitch twice or the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter twice. SeeDelayed Locking on page 2-6for more information.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET DELAYDOOR LOCK appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle’s doors.

ON (default): The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor is closed.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select theamount of time you want the exteriorlamps to remain on when it is darkenough outside. This happens afterthe key is turned from ON/RUN toLOCK/OFF.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET EXIT LIGHTINGappears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once toaccess the settings for this feature.Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the followingsettings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on.

10 SECONDS (default): Theexterior lamps will stay on for10 seconds.

30 SECONDS: The exterior lampswill stay on for 30 seconds.

2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps willstay on for two minutes.




APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exteriorlights turn on briefly during lowlight periods after unlockingthe vehicle using the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET APPROACHLIGHTING appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings forthis feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lights willturn on briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for20 seconds or until the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-4for more information.



CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET CHIMEVOLUME appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings forthis feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

NORMAL: The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay at thelast known setting.



FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features backto their factory default settings.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO RESTOREFACTORY SET appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings forthis feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): Thecustomization features will be set totheir factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: Thecustomization features will not beset to their factory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO EXIT FEATURESETTINGS appears in the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to exit the menu.

If you do not exit, pressing thecustomization button again will returnyou to the beginning of the featuresettings menu.

Exiting the FeatureSettings MenuThe feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:

• The vehicle is no longer inON/RUN.

• The trip/fuel or vehicleinformation DIC buttons arepressed.

• The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

• A 40 second time period haselapsed with no selection made.


Audio System(s)Determine which radio the vehiclehas and read the following pages tobecome familiar with its features.

{ CAUTION

Taking your eyes off the roadfor extended periods could causea crash resulting in injury ordeath to you or others. Do notgive extended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes offthe road while driving, do thefollowing while the vehicle is parked:

• Become familiar with theoperation and controls ofthe audio system.

• Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 4-3.

Notice: Contact yourdealer/retailer before adding anyequipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interferewith the operation of the vehicle’sengine, radio, or other systems,and could damage them.Follow federal rules coveringmobile radio and telephoneequipment.

Notice: The chime signalsrelated to safety belts, parkingbrake, and other functions of yourvehicle operate through theradio/entertainment system. Ifthat equipment is replacedor additional equipment is addedto your vehicle, the chimesmay not work. Make sure thatreplacement or additionalequipment is compatible withyour vehicle before installing it.See Accessories andModifications on page 5-3.

The vehicle has Retained AccessoryPower (RAP). With RAP, theaudio system can be played evenafter the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 2-15 for moreinformation.

Setting the ClockRadio with Single CD (MP3)PlayerTo set the time and date:

1. Turn the ignition key toACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.Press O to turn the radio on.

2. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month,day, and year) displays.

3. Press the softkey located belowany one of the tabs that youwant to change.


4. To increase the time or date doone of the following:

• Press the softkey locatedbelow the selected tab.

• Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.

• Turn f clockwise.

5. To decrease the time or date doone of the following:

• Press ©SEEK or s REV.

• Turn f counterclockwise.

The date does not automaticallydisplay. To see the date pressH while the radio is on. The datewith display times out after afew seconds and goes back to thenormal radio and time display.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or tochange the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press H and then the softkeylocated below the forwardarrow label. Once the time 12Hand 24H, and the dateMM/DD/YYYY (month, day, andyear) and DD/MM/YYYY (day,month, and year) displays.

2. Press the softkey located belowthe desired option.

3. Press H again to apply theselected default, or let the screentime out.

Six-Disc CD (MP3) PlayerTo set the time and date:

1. Turn the ignition key toACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.Press O to turn the radio on.

2. Press MENU.

3. Press the softkey below the Htab. The HR, MIN, MM, DD,YYYY displays.

4. Press the softkey below any oneof the tabs you want to change.

5. To increase the time or date doone of the following:

• Press the softkey locatedbelow the selected tab.

• Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.

• Turn f clockwise.

6. To decrease the time or date doone of the following:

• Press ©SEEK or s REV.

• Turn f counterclockwise.

The date does not automaticallydisplay. To see the date pressMENU and then softkey below theH tab while the radio is on. Thedate with display times out after afew seconds and goes back tothe normal radio and time display.


To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or tochange the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press MENU, and then thesoftkey below the H tab.The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYYdisplays.

2. Press the softkey below theforward arrow tab. The time12H and 24H, and the dateMM/DD/YYYY (month, day, andyear) and DD/MM/YYYY (day,month, and year) displays.

3. Press the softkey located belowthe desired option.

4. Press MENU again to apply theselected default, or let thescreen time out.

Radio(s)

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio DataSystem (RDS). The RDS featureis available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDSinformation. This system relies uponreceiving specific information

from these stations and only workswhen the information is available.While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters displays. In rare cases,a radio station can broadcastincorrect information that causes

Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD similar


the radio features to workimproperly. If this happens, contactthe radio station.

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turnthe system on and off.

Turn to increase or decrease thevolume.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped).

f (Tune): Turn to select radiostations.

©SEEK ¨: Press to go to theprevious or to the next station.

To scan stations, press and holdeither arrow for a few seconds untila beep sounds. The radio goesto a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station.Press either arrow again to stopscanning.

The radio only seeks and scansstations with a strong signal that arein the selected band.

4 (Information) (XM™ SatelliteRadio Service, MP3, andRDS Features): Press to displayadditional text information related tothe current FM-RDS station, XMstation, or MP3 song. If informationis available, the song titleinformation displays on the top lineof the display and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line.When information is not available,“NO INFO” displays.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set uptheir radio station favorites while thevehicle is parked. Tune to favoritestations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheelcontrols, if the vehicle has them.See Defensive Driving on page 4-3.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six pushbuttonspositioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by usingthe FAV button (radio favoritespage). Press the FAV button to gothrough up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritestations available per page.Each page of favorites can containany combination of AM, FM, orXM stations. To store a station as afavorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button todisplay the page wherethe station is to be stored.

3. Press and hold one of the sixpushbuttons until a beepsounds. When that pushbutton ispressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for eachpushbutton radio station tobe stored as a favorite.


The number of favorites pages canbe setup using the MENU button.To setup the number of favoritespages:

1. Press the MENU button todisplay the radio setup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the FAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressingthe pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to begin theprocess of programmingfavorites for the chosen amountof numbered pages.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,or Treble): To adjust bass,midrange, or treble, press the fknob until the tone control tabsdisplay. Continue pressing tohighlight the desired tab, or pressthe pushbutton positioned under thedesired tab. Turn the f knob toadjust the highlighted setting. Bass,midrange, or treble can also beadjusted by pressing either SEEKarrow, \ FWD, or s REVwhen the setting is highlighted untilthe desired level is obtained. If astation’s frequency is weak, or hasstatic, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, ortreble to the middle position,press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID, or TREB tabfor more than two seconds. Abeep sounds and the level adjuststo the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone andspeaker controls to the middleposition, press the f knob for morethan two seconds until a beepsounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode,press the EQ button until Manualdisplays or manually adjust thebass, midrange, or treble bypressing the f knob.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): Toadjust balance or fade, pressthe tune knob until the speakercontrol labels display. Continuepressing to highlight the desired tab,or press the pushbutton positionedunder the desired label.


Turn the f knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to adjust thehighlighted setting. The highlightedsetting can also be adjusted bypressing either SEEK arrow,\ FWD, or s REV until thedesired levels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fadeto the middle position, press thepushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds and thelevel adjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press the f knob for more thantwo seconds until a beep sounds.

Finding a Category (CAT)Station

CAT (Category): The CAT buttonis used to find XM stations whenthe radio is in the XM mode. To findXM channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until theXM frequency displays. Pressthe CAT button to displaythe category tabs on the radiodisplay. Continue pressingthe CAT button until the desiredcategory name displays.

2. Press either of the two buttonsbelow the desired category tabto immediately tune to thefirst XM station associated withthat category.

3. Turn the f knob, press thebuttons below the right orleft arrows displayed, or presseither SEEK arrow to go tothe previous or to the next XMstation within the selectedcategory.

4. To exit the category searchmode, press the FAV buttonor BAND button to displayfavorites again.

Undesired XM categories can beremoved through the setupmenu. To remove an undesiredcategory:

1. Press the MENU button todisplay the radio setup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the XM CAT tab.

3. Turn the f knob to display thecategory to be removed.

4. Press the pushbutton locatedunder the Remove tab untilthe category name along with theword Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to removemore categories.


Removed categories can berestored by pressing the pushbuttonunder the Add tab when a removedcategory is displayed or bypressing the pushbutton under theRestore All tab.

The radio does not allow categoriesto be removed or added whilethe vehicle is moving faster than5 mph (8 km/h).

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM is a satellite radio servicethat is based in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM Satellite Radiohas a wide variety of programmingand commercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. During your trial or whenyou subscribe, you will get unlimitedaccess to XM Radio Online forwhen you are not in the vehicle. Aservice fee is required to receive theXM service. For more information,contact XM at xmradio.com or

call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andxmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677in Canada.

Radio Messages for XM Only

See XM Radio Messages onpage 3-71 later in this section forfurther detail.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audiosystem has been calibrated for thevehicle from the factory. If CalibrationError displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly forthe vehicle and it must be returned toyour dealer/retailer for service.

Locked: This message displayswhen the THEFTLOCK® system haslocked up the radio. Take thevehicle to your dealer/retailer forservice.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer/retailer.

Playing a CD (Single CDPlayer)Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pullsit in and the CD should beginplaying.

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CDPlayer)

LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs intothe CD player. This CD playerholds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD:

1. Press and release the ^ button.

2. Wait for the message to insertthe disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CDpartway into the slot, label sideup. The player pulls the CD in.


To insert multiple CDs:

1. Press and hold the ^ button fortwo seconds. A beep sounds andLoad All Discs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instructionon when to insert the discs. TheCD player takes up to six CDs.

3. Press the ^ button againto cancel loading more CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned off,with a CD in the player, it staysin the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if itwas the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CDsymbol displays on the CD. As eachnew track starts to play, the tracknumber displays.

The CD player can play the smaller3 inch (8 cm) single CDs with anadapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in thesame manner.

Care of CDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R quality,the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded,and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-R(s) in their original casesor other protective cases and awayfrom direct sunlight and dust. The CDplayer scans the bottom surface ofthe disc. If the surface of a CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not playproperly or not at all. Do not touchthe bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage thesurface. Pick up CDs by grasping theouter edges or the edge of the holeand the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, takea soft, lint free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add any label to a CD, itcould get caught in the CD player. Ifa CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top ofthe recorded CD with a marking pen.

To prevent contaminating the lensof the disc optics with lubricantsinternal to the player mechanism theuse of disc lens cleaners is notadvised.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD,or more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.


Z EJECT: To eject the CD thatis currently playing, press andrelease this button. A beep soundsand Ejecting Disc displays. Oncethe disc is ejected, RemoveDisc displays. The CD can beremoved. If the CD is not removed,after several seconds, the CDautomatically pulls back into theplayer and begins playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, pressand hold Z for two secondsto eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD currently playing.

©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrowto go to the start of the current track,if more than ten seconds haveplayed. Press the right arrow to goto the next track. If either theleft or right arrow is held, or pressedmultiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track. Sound is heard ata reduced volume. Release toresume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track. Sound isheard at a reduced volume. Releaseto resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the randomsetting, the tracks can be listened toin random, rather than sequentialorder, on one CD or all CDs in asix-disc CD player.

To use random:

• Press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM tab until RandomCurrent Disc displays to play thetracks from a CD in randomorder. Press again to turn offrandom play.

• Press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM tab untilRandomize All Discs displays toplay tracks from all CDs loaded ina six-disc CD player in randomorder. Press again to turn offrandom play.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CDremains inside the radio for futurelistening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD when listening to theradio. The CD icon and tracknumber displays when a CD is inthe player.

The radio system has an auxiliaryinput jack located on the lower rightside of the faceplate. An externalaudio device such as a portableaudio player can be connected tothe auxiliary input jack for useas another source for playing CDs.


Press the CD/AUX button again andthe system begins playing audiofrom the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio playeris not connected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.

Playing an MP3 CD-R orCD-RW DiscThe vehicle’s radio system mayhave the MP3 feature. If it has thisfeature, it is capable of playingan MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. Formore information on how to playan MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc, seeUsing an MP3 on page 3-66later in this section.

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If this messagedisplays and/or the CD comes out, itcould be:

• It is very hot. When thetemperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

• The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother,the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

• There could have been a problemwhile burning the CD.

• The label could be caught in theCD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer/retailer. If theradio displays an error message,write it down and provide it to yourdealer/retailer when reportingthe problem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackThe radio system has an auxiliaryinput jack located on the lower rightside of the faceplate. This is notan audio output; do not plugthe headphone set into the frontauxiliary input jack. An externalaudio device such as an iPod™,laptop computer, MP3 player,CD changer, etc. can be connectedto the auxiliary input jack for useas another audio source.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). See DefensiveDriving on page 4-3 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cableto the radio’s front auxiliary inputjack. When a device is connected,press the radio CD/AUX buttonto begin playing audio fromthe device over the vehiclespeakers.


O (Power/Volume): Turn toincrease or decrease the volume ofthe portable player. Additionalvolume adjustments might have tobe made from the portable device ifthe volume is not loud or softenough.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device isplaying. The portable audio devicecontinues playing.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD when a portable audiodevice is playing. Press againand the system begins playing audiofrom the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio playeris not connected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.

Using an MP3MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3 files that wererecorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc.The files can be recorded with thefollowing fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variablebit rate. Song title, artist name, andalbum are available for display by theradio when recorded using ID3 tagsversion 1 and 2.

Compressed Audio

The radio also plays discs thatcontain both uncompressedCD audio (.CDA files) and MP3files. By default the radio reads onlythe uncompressed audio andignore the MP3 files. Pressing theCAT (category) button togglesbetween compressed anduncompressed audio format.

MP3 Format

To burn an MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files arerecorded on a CD-R orCD-RW disc.

• Do not mix standard audio andMP3 files on one disc.

• The CD player is able to readand play a maximum of50 folders, 50 playlists, and255 files.

• Create a folder structure thatmakes it easy to find songs whiledriving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for eachalbum. Each folder or albumshould contain 18 songs or less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system cansupport up to eight subfoldersdeep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum inorder to reduce the complexityand confusion in trying to locate aparticular folder during playback.


• Make sure playlists have a .mp3or .wpl extension, other fileextensions may not work.

• Minimize the length of the file,folder or playlist names. Long file,folder, or playlist names, or acombination of a large number offiles and folders, or playlists cancause the player to be unable toplay up to the maximum numberof files, folders, playlists, orsessions. To play a large numberof files, folders, playlists orsessions, minimize the length ofthe file, folder, or playlist name.Long names also take up morespace on the display, potentiallygetting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc beforeburning it. Trying to add music toan existing disc can cause thedisc not to function in the player.

Playlists can be changed by usingthe previous and next folder buttons,the tune knob, or the SEEK arrows.An MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that wasrecorded using no file folders can

also be played. If a CD-R or CD-RWcontains more than the maximum of50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files,the player can access and navigateup to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum are not accessible.

Root Directory

The root directory of the CD-R orCD-RW is treated as a folder. If theroot directory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays as F1ROOT. All files contained directlyunder the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directoryfolders. However, playlists (Px) arealways accessed before root foldersor files.

Empty Directory or Folder

If a root directory or a folder existssomewhere in the file structure thatcontains only folders/subfolders andno compressed files directly beneaththem, the player advances to thenext folder in the file structure thatcontains compressed audio files. Theempty folder does not display.

No Folder

When the CD contains onlycompressed files, the files arelocated under the root folder. Thenext and previous folder functions donot display on a CD that wasrecorded without folders or playlists.When displaying the name of thefolder the radio displays ROOT.

When the CD contains only playlistsand compressed audio files, butno folders, all files are located underthe root folder. The folder downand up buttons searches playlists(Px) first and then go to theroot folder. When the radio displaysthe name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.


Order of Play

Tracks recorded to the CD-R orCD-RW are played in the followingorder:

• Play begins from the first track inthe first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the lasttrack of the last folder has beenplayed, play continues fromthe first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, thedisplay does not automaticallyshow the new folder name unlessthe folder mode is chosen asthe default display. The new trackname displays.

File System and Naming

The song name that is displayed isthe song name that is containedin the ID3 tag. If the song name isnot present in the ID3 tag, thenthe radio displays the file namewithout the extension (such as .mp3)as the track name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extensionof the filename does not display.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists thatwere created by WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however,they cannot be edited using theradio. These playlists are treated asspecial folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3

Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partwayinto the slot (Single CD Player),or press the ^ button and wait forthe message to insert disc(Six-Disc CD Player), label side up.The player pulls it in, and theCD-R or CD-RW should beginplaying.

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD-R or CD-RW in theplayer, it stays in the player. Whenthe ignition or radio is turned on,the CD-R or CD-RW starts toplay where it stopped, if it was thelast selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play,the track number and song titledisplays.

Z EJECT: Press and release toeject the CD-R or CD-RW thatis playing. A beep soundsand Ejecting Disc displays. Oncethe disc is ejected, RemoveDisc displays. The CD-R or CD-RWcan be removed. If the CD-R or


CD-RW is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the CD-R orCD-RW automatically pulls back intothe player and begins playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, pressand hold this button for two secondsto eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 fileson the CD-R or CD-RW currentlyplaying.

©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrowto go to the start of the current MP3file, if more than ten secondshave played. Press the right arrowto go to the next MP3 file. Ifeither arrow is held or pressedmultiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forwardthrough MP3 files on the CD.

Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe pushbutton positioned under theFolder label to go to the firsttrack in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press thepushbutton positioned underthe Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press andhold to reverse playback quicklywithin an MP3 file. Sound is heardat a reduced volume. Releaseto resume playing the file. Theelapsed time of the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within an MP3 file. Sound isheard at a reduced volume.Release to resume playing the file.The elapsed time of the filedisplays.

RDM (Random): With the randomsetting, the MP3 files on theCD-R or CD-RW can be listened toin random, rather than sequentialorder, on one CD-R/CD-RW orall discs in a six-disc CD player. Touse random, do one of thefollowing:

1. To play MP3 files from the CD-Ror CD-RW in random order,press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM label untilRandom Current Disc displays.Press the same pushbutton againto turn off random play.

2. To play songs from all CDsloaded in a six-disc CD player inrandom order, press thepushbutton positioned under theRDM label until RandomizeAll Discs displays. Pressthe same pushbutton again toturn off random play.


h (Music Navigator): Use themusic navigator feature to play MP3files on the CD-R or CD-RW in orderby artist or album. Press thepushbutton located below the musicnavigator label. The player scans thedisc to sort the files by artist andalbum ID3 tag information. It cantake several minutes to scan the discdepending on the number of MP3files recorded to the CD-R orCD-RW. The radio can begin playingwhile it is scanning the disc in thebackground. When the scan isfinished, the CD-R or CD-RW beginsplaying again.

Once the disc has been scanned, theplayer defaults to playing MP3 files inorder by artist. The current artistplaying is shown on the second lineof the display between the arrows.Once all songs by that artist areplayed, the player moves to the nextartist in alphabetical order on theCD-R/CD-RW and begins playingMP3 files by that artist. To listen toMP3 files by another artist, press thepushbutton located below either

arrow button. The disc goes to thenext or previous artist in alphabeticalorder. Continue pressing eitherbutton until the desired artist isdisplayed.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album, press thepushbutton located below the SortBy label. From the sort screen, pushone of the buttons below the albumbutton. Press the pushbutton belowthe back label to return to the mainmusic navigator screen. Now thealbum name is displayed on thesecond line between the arrows andsongs from the current album beginsto play. Once all songs from thatalbum are played, the player movesto the next album in alphabeticalorder on the CD-R/CD-RW andbegins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe pushbutton below the Back labelto return to normal MP3 playback.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The inactiveCD remains inside the radio forfuture listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD while listening to theradio. The CD icon and a messageshowing disc and/or track numberdisplays while a CD is in the player.Press this button again and thesystem automatically searches foran auxiliary input device suchas a portable audio player. If aportable audio player is notconnected, “No Aux Input Device”displays.


XM Radio MessagesXL (Explicit Language Channels):These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated,and no action is required. Thisprocess should take no longer than30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blockingthe XM™ signal. When the vehicleis moved into an open area, thesignal should return.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audioand text data. No action is needed.This message should disappearshortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tunein to another channel.

Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be receivedwith your XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned. Tune to another station. Ifthis station was one of the presets,choose another station for thatpreset button.

No Artist Info: No artist informationis available at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

No Title Info: No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No CAT Info: No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Information: No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

CAT Not Found: There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory. The system is workingproperly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM™receiver in your vehicle couldhave previously been in anothervehicle. For security purposes,XM™ receivers cannot be swappedbetween vehicles. If this messageis received after having your vehicleserviced, check with yourdealer/retailer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with theXM™ Radio 8 digit radio IDlabel. This label is needed toactivate the service.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer/retailer.


Check XM Receivr: If this messagedoes not clear within a shortperiod of time, the receiver couldhave a fault. Consult with yourdealer/retailer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a shortperiod of time, the receiver couldhave a fault. Consult with yourdealer/retailer.

Bluetooth®

Vehicles with a Bluetooth system canuse a Bluetooth capable cell phonewith a Hands Free Profile to makeand receive phone calls. The systemcan be used while the key is inON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 30 ft. (9.1 m).Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones are guaranteed towork with the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem. See gm.com/bluetooth formore information on compatiblephones.

Voice RecognitionThe Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting fora voice command. Wait untilthe tone and then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio SystemWhen using the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes throughthe vehicle’s front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call,to change the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains

in memory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth ControlsUse the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate thein-vehicle Bluetooth system. SeeAudio Steering Wheel Controlson page 3-82 for more information.

J / 0 (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and to startspeech recognition.

− / K (Phone On Hook): Pressto end a call and to cancel anoperation.

PairingA Bluetooth enabled cell phonemust be paired to the in-vehicleBluetooth system first and thenconnected to the vehicle before itcan be used. See the cell phonemanufacturers user guide for


Bluetooth functions before pairingthe cell phone. If a Bluetooth phoneis not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling, if available. Refer tothe OnStar owner’s guide for moreinformation.

Pairing Information:

• Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the in-vehicleBluetooth system.

• The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

• The in-vehicle Bluetooth systemautomatically links with the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder the phone was paired.

• Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the in-vehicleBluetooth system at a time.

• Pairing should only need to becompleted once, unless changesto the pairing information havebeen made or the phone isdeleted.

To link to a different paired phone,see Linking to a Different Phonelater in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold J / 0 fortwo seconds. The systemresponds with “Ready” followedby a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The systemresponds with “Bluetoothready” followed by a tone.

3. Say “Pair”. The system respondswith instructions and a four digitPIN number. The PIN numberwill be used in Step 4.

4. Start the Pairing process on thecell phone that will be paired tothe vehicle. Reference thecell phone manufacturers userguide for information on thisprocess.

Locate the device named“General Motors” in the list on thecellular phone and follow theinstructions on the cell phone toenter the four digit PIN numberthat was provided in Step 3.

5. The system prompts for a namefor the phone. Use a name thatbest describes the phone.This name will be used toindicate which phone isconnected. The system thenconfirms the name provided.

6. The system responds with“<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 foradditional phones to be paired.


Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones



3. Say “List”. The system lists allthe paired Bluetooth devices.If a phone is connected tothe vehicle, the system will say“Is connected” after theconnected phone.

Deleting a Paired Phone



3. Say “Delete”. The system askswhich phone to delete followedby a tone.

4. Say the name of the phone to bedeleted. If the phone name isunknown, use the “List” commandfor a list of all paired phones. Thesystem responds with “Would youlike to delete <phone name>?Yes or No” followed by a tone.

5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone.The system responds with “OK,deleting <phone name>”.

Linking to a Different Phone



3. Say “Change phone”. Thesystem responds with “Pleasewait while I search for otherphones”.

• If another phone is found, theresponse will be “<Phonename> is now connected”.

• If another phone is not found,the original phone remainsconnected.

Storing Name TagsThe system can store up to thirtyphone numbers as name tagsthat are shared between theBluetooth and OnStar systems.

The system uses the followingcommands to store and retrievephone numbers:

• Store

• Digit Store

• Directory


Using the Store Command

The store command allows a phonenumber to be stored withoutentering the digits individually.


2. Say “Store”. The systemresponds with “Store, numberplease” followed by a tone.

3. Say the complete phone numberto be stored at once with nopauses.

• If the system recognizes thenumber it responds with“OK, Storing” and repeats thephone number.

• If the system is unsure itrecognizes the phone number,it responds with “Store” andrepeats the number followedby “Please say yes or no”. Ifthe number is correct, say“Yes”. If the number is notcorrect, say “No”. The systemwill ask for the number to bere-entered.

4. After the system stores thephone number, it respondswith “Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phonenumber. The name tag isrecorded and the systemresponds with “About tostore <name tag>. Does thatsound OK?”.

• If the name tag does not soundcorrect, say “No” and repeatStep 5.

• If the name tag soundscorrect, say “Yes” and thename tag is stored. After thenumber is stored the systemreturns to the main menu.

Using the Digit Store Command

The digit store command allowsa phone number to be storedby entering the digits individually.


2. Say “Digit Store”. The systemresponds with “Please say thefirst digit to store” followedby a tone.


3. Say the first digit to be stored.The system will repeat backthe digit it heard followed by atone. Continue entering digitsuntil the number to be stored iscomplete.

• If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system,say “Clear” at any timeto clear the last number.

• To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any timeand the system willrepeat them.

4. After the complete number hasbeen entered, say “Store”. Thesystem responds with “Pleasesay the name tag” followed bya tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phonenumber. The name tag isrecorded and the systemresponds with “About to store<name tag>. Does thatsound OK?”.

• If the name tag does not soundcorrect, say “No” and repeatStep 5.

• If the name tag soundscorrect, say “Yes” and thename tag is stored. After thenumber is stored the systemreturns to the main menu.

Using the Directory Command

The directory command listsall of the name tags stored by thesystem. To use the directorycommand:


2. Say “Directory”. The systemresponds with “Directory”and then plays back all of thestored name tags. When the listis complete, the systemreturns to the main menu.

Deleting Name TagsThe system uses the followingcommands to delete name tags:

• Delete

• Delete all name tags

Using the Delete Command

The delete command allows specificname tags to be deleted.

To use the delete command:


2. Say “Delete”. The systemresponds with “Delete, pleasesay the name tag” followed bya tone.


3. Say the name tag to be deleted.The system responds with“Would you like to delete,<name tag>? Please say yesor no”.

• If the name tag is correct, say“Yes” to delete the name tag.The system responds with“OK, deleting <name tag>,returning to the main menu.”

• If the name tag is incorrect,say “No”. The systemresponds with “No. OK, let’stry again, please say thename tag.”

Using the Delete All Name TagsCommand

The delete all name tags commanddeletes all stored phone bookname tags and route name tags forOnStar (if present).

To use the delete all name tagscommand:


2. Say “Delete all name tags”. Thesystem responds with “You areabout to delete all name tagsstored in your phone directoryand your route destinationdirectory. Are you sure you wantto do this? Please say yes or no.”

• Say “Yes” to delete allname tags.

• Say “No” to cancel the functionand return to the main menu.

Making a CallCalls can be made using thefollowing commands:

• Dial

• Digit Dial

• Call

• Re-dial

Using the Dial Command


2. Say “Dial”. The system respondswith “Dial using <phone name>.“Number please” followed bya tone.

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing.

• If the system recognizes thenumber, it responds with“OK, Dialing” and dialsthe number.

• If the system does notrecognize the number,it confirms the numbersfollowed by a tone. If thenumber is correct, say “Yes”.The system responds with“OK, Dialing” and dialsthe number. If the number isnot correct, say “No”. Thesystem will ask for the numberto be re-entered.


Using the Digit Dial Command


2. Say “Digit Dial”. The systemresponds with “Digit dialusing <phone name>, please saythe first digit to dial” followedby a tone.

3. Say the digit to be dialed one ata time. Following each digit, thesystem will repeat back thedigit it heard followed by a tone.

4. Continue entering digits until thenumber to be dialed is complete.After the whole number hasbeen entered, say “Dial”.The system responds with “OK,Dialing” and dials the number.

• If an unwanted numberis recognized by the system,say “Clear” at any time toclear the last number.

• To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time and thesystem will repeat them.

Using the Call Command


2. Say “Call”. The system respondswith “Call using <phone name>.Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag of the personto call.

• If the system clearlyrecognizes the name tag itresponds with “OK, calling,<name tag>” and dialsthe number.

• If the system is unsure itrecognizes the right name tag,it confirms the name tagfollowed by a tone. Ifthe name tag is correct, say“Yes”. The system respondswith “OK, calling, <nametag>” and dials the number. Ifthe name tag is not correct,say “No”. The system will askfor the name tag to bere-entered.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the Re-dial Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. Thesystem responds with “Re-dialusing <phone name>” and dialsthe last number called from theconnected Bluetooth phone.


Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Receiving a CallWhen an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and aring tone is heard in the vehicle.

• Press J / 0 and begin speakingto answer the call.

• Press − / K to ignore a call.

Call WaitingCall waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabledby the wireless service carrierto work.

• Press J / 0 to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

• Press J / 0 again to return to theoriginal call.

• To ignore the incoming call,continue with the original call withno action.

• Press − / K to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to thecall on hold.

Three-Way CallingThree-Way Calling must besupported on the Bluetooth phoneand enabled by the wireless servicecarrier to work.

1. While on a call press J / 0. Thesystem responds with “Ready”followed by a tone.

2. Say “Three-way call”. Thesystem responds with “Three-waycall, please say dial or call”.

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press J / 0 to link all the callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Press − / K to end a call.

Muting a CallDuring a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so thatthe person on the other end ofthe call cannot hear them.

To Mute a call

1. Press J / 0. The systemresponds with “Ready” followedby a tone.

2. Say “Mute Call”. The systemresponds with “Call muted”.

To Cancel Mute


2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”.The system responds with“Resuming call”.


Transferring a CallAudio can be transferred betweenthe in-vehicle Bluetooth systemand the cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to the CellPhone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:


2. Say “Transfer Call.” The systemresponds with “Transferring call”and the audio will switch fromthe vehicle to the cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to theIn-Vehicle Bluetooth System

The cellular phone must be pairedand connected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes afterthe key is turned to the ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY position.

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press J / 0 for morethan two seconds. The audioswitches from the cell phone to thevehicle.

Voice Pass-ThruVoice Pass-Thru allows access tothe voice recognition commands onthe cell phone. See the cellphone manufacturers user guide tosee if the cell phone supportsthis feature. This feature can beused to verbally access contactsstored in the cell phone.



3. Say “Voice”. The systemresponds with “OK, accessing<phone name>”.

• The cell phone’s normalprompt messages willgo through its cycle accordingto the phone’s operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) TonesThe in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers and numbers storedas name tags during a call. This isused when calling a menu drivenphone system. Account numbers canbe programmed into the phonebookfor retrieval during menu driven calls.

Sending a Number During a Call


2. Say “Dial”. The system respondswith “Say a number to sendtones” followed by a tone.


3. Say the number to send.

• If the system clearlyrecognizes the number itresponds with “OK, SendingNumber” and the dialtones are sent and the callcontinues.

• If the system is not sure itrecognized the numberproperly, it responds “DialNumber, Please say yes orno?” followed by a tone. If thenumber is correct, say“Yes”. The system respondswith “OK, Sending Number”and the dial tones aresent and the call continues.

Sending a Stored Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Send name tag.” Thesystem responds with “Saya name tag to send tones”followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag to send.

• If the system clearlyrecognizes the name tag itresponds with “OK, Sending<name tag>” and the dialtones are sent and thecall continues.

• If the system is not sure itrecognized the name tagproperly, it responds“Dial <name tag>, Please sayyes or no?” followed by atone. If the name tag iscorrect, say “Yes”. Thesystem responds with “OK,Sending <name tag>” and thedial tones are sent and thecall continues.

Clearing the SystemUnless information is deleted out ofthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system,it will be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags inthe phonebook and phone pairinginformation. For information onhow to delete this information, see

the above sections on Deleting aPaired Phone and DeletingName Tags.

Other InformationThe Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of suchmarks by General Motors is underlicense. Other trademarks andtrade names are those of theirrespective owners.

This device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules. Operation issubject to the following twoconditions:




This device complies with RSS-210of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following twoconditions:




Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle’sradio by learning a portion ofthe Vehicle Identification Number(VIN). The radio does not operate ifit is stolen or moved to a differentvehicle.

Audio Steering WheelControls

Some audio controls can beadjusted at the steering wheel. Theyinclude the following:

+ / − (Next/Previous): Press andrelease to go to the next or theprevious preset radio station or CDtrack.

K (End Call): For vehicles withthe OnStar® system, press to end aHands-Free call, an OnStar® call,cancel an incoming call, or endthe Advisor Playback.

For vehicles with Bluetooth®, pressto end a call, or cancel anincoming call.

v + v −(Volume): Move thethumbwheel up or down to increaseor to decrease the volume.

J 0 (Call / Mute): Press andrelease to mute the system. Press itagain to turn the sound back on.

For vehicles with OnStar® orBluetooth systems, press and holdfor longer than two seconds tointeract with those systems. SeeOnStar® System on page 2-29 andBluetooth® on page 3-72 in thismanual for more information.


Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug the itemfrom the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM StereoFM signals only reach about10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Although the radio has a built-inelectronic circuit that automaticallyworks to reduce interference,some static can occur, especiallyaround tall buildings or hills, causingthe sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception fromcoast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada.Just as with FM, tall buildings or hillscan interfere with satellite radiosignals, causing the sound to fadein and out. In addition, travelingor standing under heavy foliage,bridges, garages, or tunnelsmay cause loss of the XM signal fora period of time.

Cellular Phone UsageCellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle’s radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone’s battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening tothe radio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.


Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna canwithstand most car washes withoutbeing damaged as long as it issecurely attached to the base. If themast becomes slightly bent,straighten it out by hand. If the mastis badly bent, replace it.

Occasionally check to make surethe antenna is tightened to its base.If tightening is required, tightenby hand.

XM™ Satellite RadioAntenna SystemThe XM Satellite Radio antenna islocated on the roof of the vehicle.Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear radioreception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, theperformance of the XM system maybe affected if the sunroof is open.

Chime Level AdjustmentThe radio may be used to adjustthe vehicle’s chime level. If the radiocan be used to change the volumelevel of the chime, press andhold the sixth FAV softkey with theignition on and the radio poweroff. The volume level changesbetween Normal and Loud. Theselected volume level appears onthe radio display.

Removing the radio and notreplacing it with a factory radio orchime module will disable vehiclechimes.


Driving YourVehicle

Your Driving, the Road,and the VehicleDriving Your Vehicle ...........4-1Driver Behavior ...................4-2Driving Environment ............4-2Vehicle Design ...................4-2Driving for Better FuelEconomy ...........................4-3

Defensive Driving ................4-3Drunk Driving .....................4-4Control of a Vehicle ............4-4Braking ...............................4-5Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) ...................4-6

Braking in Emergencies ......4-6StabiliTrak® System ............4-7Traction ControlSystem (TCS) ...................4-8

Steering ..............................4-9

Off-Road Recovery ............4-10Passing .............................4-11Loss of Control .................4-11Driving at Night .................4-12Driving in Rain and onWet Roads ......................4-13

Before Leaving on aLong Trip ........................4-14

Highway Hypnosis .............4-14Hill and MountainRoads .............................4-14

Winter Driving ...................4-15If Your Vehicle is Stuckin Sand, Mud, Ice,or Snow ...........................4-17

Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out .......................4-17

Loading the Vehicle ..........4-18

TowingTowing Your Vehicle .........4-22Recreational VehicleTowing ............................4-23

Towing a Trailer ................4-26

Your Driving, theRoad, and the Vehicle

Driving Your VehicleWhenever we drive, we are takingon an important responsibility.This is true for any motorvehicle — passenger car, van,truck, sport utility. Driver behavior,the driving environment, andthe vehicle’s design all affect howwell a vehicle performs. Butstatistics show that the mostimportant factor, by far, is howwe drive.

Knowing how these three factorswork together can help youunderstand how your vehiclehandles and what you can do toavoid many types of crashes,including a rollover crash.

Driving Your Vehicle 4-1

Driver BehaviorThe single most important thing isthis: everyone in the vehicle,including the driver, should buckleup. See Safety Belts: They Arefor Everyone on page 1-10. In fact,most serious injuries and fatalitiesto unbelted occupants can bereduced or prevented by the use ofsafety belts. In a rollover crash,an unbelted person is significantlymore likely to die than a personwearing a seat belt. In addition,avoiding excessive speed, suddenor abrupt turns, and drunken oraggressive driving can help maketrips safer and avoid the possibilityof a crash, especially a rollovercrash. This section provides manyuseful tips to help you drivemore safely.

Driving EnvironmentYou can also help avoid a rolloveror other type of crash by beingprepared for driving in inclementweather, at night, or duringother times where visibility ortraction may be limited, such as oncurves, slippery roads, or hillyterrain. Unfamiliar surroundings canalso have hidden hazards.

To help you learn more about drivingin different conditions, this sectioncontains information about city,freeway, and off-road driving, as wellas other hints for driving in variousweather conditions.

Vehicle DesignAccording to the U.S. Departmentof Transportation, utility vehicleshave a significantly higher rolloverrate than other types of vehicles.

Utility vehicles do have higherground clearance and a narrowertrack or shorter wheelbase thanpassenger cars, to make them morecapable for off-road driving.Specific design characteristics likethese give the driver a better view ofthe road, but also give utilityvehicles a higher center of gravitythan other types of vehicles.This means that you should notexpect a utility vehicle to handle thesame way a vehicle with a lowercenter of gravity, like a car, would insimilar situations.

But driver behavior factors are farmore often the cause of a utilityvehicle rollover than areenvironmental or vehicle factors.Safe driver behavior andunderstanding the environment inwhich you will be driving can helpavoid a rollover crash in any type ofvehicle, including utility vehicles.

4-2 Driving Your Vehicle

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.

• Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

• Brake gradually and avoidabrupt stops.

• Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

• When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control, if equipped.

• Always follow posted speed limitsor drive more slowly whenconditions require.

• Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

• Combine several trips into asingle trip.

• Replace the vehicle’s tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire’s sidewallnear the size.

• Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” Thefirst step in driving defensively is towear your safety belt — SeeSafety Belts: They Are for Everyoneon page 1-10.

{ CAUTION

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

• Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

• Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniques couldsave your life.


Drunk Driving

{ CAUTION

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or ifyou are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show that almost40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, these deathsare the result of someone who wasdrinking and driving. In recent years,more than 17,000 annual motorvehicle-related deaths have beenassociated with the use of alcohol,with about 250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state todrink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, anddevelopmental reasons forthese laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problemis for people never to drink alcoholand then drive.

Medical research shows that alcoholin a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especiallyinjuries to the brain, spinal cord, orheart. This means that when anyonewho has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, thatperson’s chance of being killed orpermanently disabled is higher thanif the person had not been drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systemshelp to control the vehicle whiledriving —brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control ofthe vehicle. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 4-8.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 5-3.


BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light onpage 3-27.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Decidingto push the brake pedal isperception time. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree-fourths of a second. But thatis only an average. It might beless with one driver and as long astwo or three seconds or morewith another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination,and eyesight all play a part. Sodo alcohol, drugs, and frustration.But even in three-fourths of asecond, a vehicle moving at 60 mph(100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enoughspace between the vehicleand others is important.

And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition ofthe road, whether it is wet, dry, oricy; tire tread; the condition ofthe brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Somepeople drive in spurts — heavyacceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pacewith traffic. This is a mistake. Thebrakes might not have time to coolbetween hard stops. The brakes willwear out much faster with a lot ofheavy braking. Keeping pace withthe traffic and allowing realisticfollowing distances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. If the brakes are pumped,the pedal could get harder topush down. If the engine stops,there will still be some power brakeassist but it will be used whenthe brake is applied. Once the powerassist is used up, it can takelonger to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 5-3.


Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away,ABS checks itself. A momentarymotor or clicking noise mightbe heard while this test is going on,and it might even be noticed thatthe brake pedal moves a little. Thisis normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. SeeAntilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light on page 3-28.

Let us say the road is wet and youare driving safely. Suddenly, ananimal jumps out in front of you.You slam on the brakes andcontinue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately workthe brakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This canhelp the driver steer aroundthe obstacle while braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a footup to the brake pedal or alwaysdecrease stopping distance. If youget too close to the vehicle infront of you, there will not be enoughtime to apply the brakes if thatvehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leave enough room upahead to stop, even with ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly andlet antilock work. The antilock pumpor motor operating might beheard and the brake pedal might befelt to pulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can help morethan even the very best braking.


StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has a vehicle stabilityenhancement system calledStabiliTrak which combines antilockbrake, traction and stability controlsystems and helps the drivermaintain directional control of thevehicle in most driving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a discrepancybetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle’s brakes to assistthe driver with keeping the vehicleon the intended path.

When the vehicle is started andbegins to move, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto insure there are no problems.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working. This is normaland does not mean there is aproblem with the vehicle.

This light is located on theinstrument panel cluster.

It will flash when StabiliTrak is bothon and activated.

If the system fails to turn on oractivate, this light will be on solid.When the light is on solid, thesystem will not assist the drivermaintain directional control ofthe vehicle. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

The StabiliTrak system automaticallycomes on whenever the vehicle isstarted. To assist the driver withvehicle directional control, especiallyin slippery road conditions, thesystem should always be left on.StabiliTrak can be turned off ifneeded.

The Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak button is locatedon the instrument panel.

TCS can be turned off or turned onby pressing and releasing theTCS/StabiliTrak button. To disableboth StabiliTrak and TCS, press andhold the button until the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light turnson solid.


It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if thevehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice orsnow, and you want to “rock” thevehicle to attempt to free it.

StabiliTrak may also turn offautomatically if it determines that aproblem exists with the system. TheTCS/StabiliTrak warning light will beon solid to warn the driver thatStabiliTrak is disabled and requiresservice. If the problem does not clearitself after restarting the vehicle, seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

If cruise control is being used whenStabiliTrak activates, the cruisecontrol automatically disengages.The cruise control can bere-engaged when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 3-9.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)The vehicle has a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature as part of theStabiliTrak system. If the vehicle istowing a trailer and the systemdetects that the trailer is swaying, thevehicle’s brakes are applied withoutthe driver pressing the brake pedal.The TCS/StabiliTrak warning lightwill flash on the instrument panelcluster to notify the driver to reducespeed. If the trailer continues tosway, StabiliTrak will reduce enginetorque to help slow the vehicle.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect the vehicle’sperformance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 5-3 formore information.

Traction Control System(TCS)The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) that limits wheel spin.This is especially useful in slipperyroad conditions. The systemoperates only if it senses that one orboth of the front wheels are spinningor beginning to lose traction. Whenthis happens, TCS applies thebrakes to limit wheel spin and alsoreduces engine power. The systemmay be heard or felt while it isworking, but this is normal.

This light will flash when TCS islimiting wheel spin.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicle isstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow, andyou want to “rock” the vehicle to


attempt to free it. See Rocking YourVehicle to Get It Out on page 4-17and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-17 formore information.

The TCS/StabiliTrak® button islocated on the instrument panel.

Press and release this button to turnoff TCS. The TCS warning lightwill be displayed on the instrumentpanel. The traction control systemcan be turned back on by pressingthe TCS/StabiliTrak button.

If the system is limiting wheel spinwhen the button is pressed, thesystem will not turn off until there isno longer a current need to limitwheel spin. The system canbe turned back on at any time bypressing the button again. If theTCS light does not come on,

TCS may not be functioningproperly and the vehicle should beserviced at your dealer/retailer.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect the vehicle’sperformance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 5-3 formore information.

SteeringElectric Power SteeringIf the engine stalls while driving, thepower steering assist system willcontinue to operate until youare able to stop the vehicle. If powersteering assist is lost because theelectric power steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.

If you turn the steering wheel ineither direction several times until itstops, or hold the steering wheelin the stopped position for anextended amount of time, you may

notice a reduced amount of powersteering assist. The normalamount of power steering assistshould return shortly after afew normal steering movements.

The electric power steering systemdoes not require regularmaintenance. If you suspectsteering system problems and/or theService Vehicle Soon light comeson, contact your dealer/retailerfor service repairs.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and theroad surface, the angle at which thecurve is banked, and vehiclespeed. While in a curve, speed isthe one factor you can control.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve,while the front wheels are straight.


Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintaina reasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve,and then accelerate gently into thestraightaway.

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering canbe more effective than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill andfind a truck stopped in your lane, or acar suddenly pulls out from nowhere,or a child darts out from betweenparked cars and stops right in front ofyou. These problems can be avoidedby braking — if you can stop in time.But sometimes you cannot stop intime because there is no room.That is the time for evasiveaction — steering around theproblem.

The vehicle can perform very wellin emergencies like these. First applythe brakes. See Braking onpage 4-5. It is better to removeas much speed as possible from a

collision. Then steer around theproblem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel atthe recommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and justas quickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wearsafety belts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle’s right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is onlyslightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy.


Ease off the accelerator and then, ifthere is nothing in the way, steer sothat the vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. Turn the steeringwheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm,(about one-eighth turn) until the rightfront tire contacts the pavementedge. Then turn the steering wheelto go straight down the roadway.

PassingPassing another vehicle on atwo-lane road can be dangerous.To reduce the risk of dangerwhile passing:

• Look down the road, to the sides,and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect a successfulpass. If in doubt, wait.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavementmarkings, and lines that couldindicate a turn or an intersection.Never cross a solid ordouble-solid line on yourside of the lane.

• Do not get too close to the vehicleyou want to pass. Doing so canreduce your visibility.

• Wait your turn to pass a slowvehicle.

• When you are being passed,ease to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens whenthe three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — donot have enough friction where thetires meet the road to do whatthe driver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose controlof the vehicle. Defensive driversavoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existingconditions, and by not overdrivingthose conditions. But skids arealways possible.

The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle’s three controlsystems. In the braking skid, thewheels are not rolling. In the steeringor cornering skid, too much speed orsteering in a curve causes tires toslip and lose cornering force. And inthe acceleration skid, too muchthrottle causes the driving wheelsto spin.

Remember: Any traction controlsystem helps avoid only theacceleration skid. If the tractioncontrol system is off, then anacceleration skid is best handledby easing your foot off theaccelerator pedal.


If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steeringquickly enough, the vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready fora second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important toslow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance will belonger and vehicle control morelimited.

While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try your best toavoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducing vehiclespeed by shifting to a lower gear.Any sudden changes could causethe tires to slide. You may not realizethe surface is slippery until the

vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirroredsurface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

Remember: Any Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) helps avoid onlythe braking skid.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous thanday driving because some driversare likely to be impaired — by alcoholor drugs, with night vision problems,or by fatigue.

Night driving tips include:

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Reduce headlamp glareby adjusting the insiderearview mirror.

• Slow down and keep more spacebetween you and other vehiclesbecause headlamps can onlylight up so much road ahead.

• Watch for animals.

• When tired, pull off the road.

• Do not wear sunglasses.

• Avoid staring directly intoapproaching headlamps.

• Keep the windshield and all glasson your vehicle clean — insideand out.

• Keep your eyes moving,especially during turns or curves.

No one can see as well at night asin the daytime. But, as we getolder, these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver might needat least twice as much light to seethe same thing at night as a20-year-old.


Driving in Rain and onWet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{ CAUTION

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under your vehicle’stires so they actually ride onthe water. This can happen if the

road is wet enough and you aregoing fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has littleor no contact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice isto slow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather TipsBesides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

• Allow extra following distance.

• Pass with caution.

• Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.

• Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

• Have good tires with proper treaddepth. See Tires on page 5-38.

• Turn off cruise control.


Before Leaving on aLong TripTo prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, consider having it servicedby your dealer/retailer beforedeparting.

Things to check on your owninclude:

• Windshield Washer Fluid:Reservoir full? Windowsclean — inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: In good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Alllevels checked?

• Lamps: Do they all work and arelenses clean?

• Tires: Are treads good? Are tiresinflated to recommendedpressure?

• Weather and Maps: Safe totravel? Have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving. Ifyou become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park your vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:

• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.

• Keep interior temperature cool.

• Keep your eyes moving — scanthe road ahead and to the sides.

• Check the rearview mirror andvehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:

• Keep the vehicle servicedand in good shape.

• Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

• Going down steep or long hills,shift to a lower gear.

{ CAUTION

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.


{ CAUTION

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) orwith the ignition off is dangerous.The brakes will have to do all thework of slowing down and theycould get so hot that they wouldnot work well. You would thenhave poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash.Always have the engine runningand the vehicle in gear when goingdownhill.

• Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

• Top of hills: Be alert — somethingcould be in your lane (stalled car,accident).

• Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter DrivingDriving on Snow or IceDrive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 32°F(0°C) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gentlyso traction is not lost. Acceleratingtoo quickly causes the wheelsto spin and makes the surface underthe tires slick, so there is evenless traction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 4-6 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distanceon any slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface ofa curve or an overpass can remainicy when the surrounding roadsare clear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking while on ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped,on slippery surfaces.


Blizzard ConditionsBeing stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 7-5.To get help and keep everyonein the vehicle safe:

• Turn on the Hazard WarningFlashers on page 3-5.

• Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ CAUTION

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This may causeexhaust gases to get inside.Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:• Clear away snow from

around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that isblocking the exhaust pipe.

• Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

• Open a window about twoinches (5 cm) on the side ofthe vehicle that is away fromthe wind to bring in fresh air.

• Fully open the air outlets on orunder the instrument panel.

• Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System inthe Index.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)


Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This can causedeadly CO (carbon monoxide) gasto get inside. CO could overcomeyou and kill you. You cannot see itor smell it, so you might not know itis in your vehicle. Clear away snowfrom around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that isblocking the exhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm,but be careful.

To save fuel, run the engine foronly short periods as needed towarm the vehicle and then shut theengine off and close the windowmost of the way to save heat.


Repeat this until help arrives but onlywhen you feel really uncomfortablefrom the cold. Moving about to keepwarm also helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for help withthe headlamps. Do this as little aspossible to save fuel.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck inSand, Mud, Ice, or SnowSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out on page 4-17.

If the vehicle has a traction system, itcan often help to free a stuck vehicle.Refer to the vehicle’s traction systemin the Index. If stuck too severely forthe traction system to free thevehicle, turn the traction system offand use the rocking method.

{ CAUTION

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin athigh speed, they can explode, andyou or others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid going above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 5-57.

Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It OutTurn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area aroundthe front wheels. Turn off anytraction system. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and aforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait untilthe wheels stop spinning beforeshifting gears. Release theaccelerator pedal while shifting, andpress lightly on the acceleratorpedal when the transmission is ingear. Slowly spinning the wheels inthe forward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion thatcould free the vehicle. If that doesnot get the vehicle out after afew tries, it might need to be towedout. If the vehicle does need tobe towed out, see Towing YourVehicle on page 4-22.


Loading the VehicleIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on your vehicle showhow much weight it may properlycarry, the Tire and LoadingInformation label and theCertification/Tire label.

{ CAUTION

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front orrear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). If you do, parts onthe vehicle can break, and itcan change the way yourvehicle handles. These couldcause you to lose control andcrash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar) of your vehicle. With thedriver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the doorlock post (striker). The tire andloading information label showsthe number of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

Example Label


The Tire and Loading Informationlabel also shows the size of theoriginal equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tireinflation pressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 5-38 andInflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-43.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It tellsyou the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and theGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for the front and rearaxle. See “Certification/TireLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight of occupantsand cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” onyour vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weightof the driver and passengersfrom XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount ofcargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, ifthe “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will befive 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amountof available cargo andluggage load capacityis 650 lbs (1400 − 750(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage andcargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity for your vehicle.

See Towing a Trailer onpage 4-26 for importantinformation on towing a trailer,towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.


A. Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 1,000 lbs(453 kg).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 = 300 lbs(136 kg).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs(317 kg).

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 2 = 1,000 lbs(453 kg).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 750 lbs(340 kg).

C. Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg).

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 3 = 1,000 lbs(453 kg).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight200 lbs(91 kg) × 5 = 1,000 lbs(453 kg).

C. Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg).

Refer to your vehicle’s tire andloading information label forspecific information about yourvehicle’s capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedyour vehicle’s capacity weight.

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3


Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specificCertification/Tire label isattached to the lower area ofthe center pillar (B-Pillar).

The label shows the grossweight capacity of your vehicle.This is called the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).

The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, cargo, and trailer tongueweight, if the vehicle is pulling atrailer.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximumweights for the front and rearaxles, called the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). To findout the actual loads on yourfront and rear axles, you need togo to a weigh station andweigh your vehicle. Yourdealer/retailer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread outyour load equally on both sidesof the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle or the GAWRfor either the front or rear axle.

{ CAUTION

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front orrear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). If you do, parts onthe vehicle can break, and itcan change the way yourvehicle handles. These couldcause you to lose control andcrash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of the vehicle.

Notice: Overloading yourvehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Do notoverload your vehicle.

Label Example


If you put things inside yourvehicle — like suitcases, tools,packages, or anything else, theywill go as fast as the vehiclegoes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash,they will keep going.

{ CAUTION

Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargoarea of your vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

• Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Do not leave an unsecuredchild restraint in yourvehicle.

• When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secure itwhenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleTo avoid damage, the disabledvehicle should be towed with allfour wheels off the ground. Consultyour dealer/retailer or a professionaltowing service if the disabledvehicle must be towed. SeeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 7-5.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motorhome, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing”following.


Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most commontypes of recreational vehicle towingare known as dinghy towing anddolly towing. Dinghy towing is towingthe vehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreationalvehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity ofthe towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer’srecommendations.

• What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far andhow long they can tow.

• Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer/retailer or traileringprofessional for additional adviceand equipmentrecommendations.

• Is the vehicle ready to be towed?Just as preparing the vehicle fora long trip, make sure thevehicle is prepared to be towed.See Before Leaving on aLong Trip on page 4-14.

Dinghy TowingThis vehicle may be dinghy towedfrom the front. This vehicle may alsobe towed by putting the frontwheels on a dolly. See “DollyTowing” later in this section.

For vehicles being dinghy towed,the vehicle should be run at thebeginning of each day and at eachRV fuel stop for about five minutes.This will ensure proper lubrication oftransmission components.

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle that willbe towed and secure it tothe towing vehicle.

2. Turn the ignition key toACC/ACCESSORY.


3. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

4. Turn fog lamps and allaccessories off.

5. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle is beingtowed, remove the 2 amp IGNSW fuse from the instrumentpanel fuse block and store it in asafe location. See InstrumentPanel Fuse Block on page 5-76

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwithout performing each ofthe steps listed under “DinghyTowing,” the automatictransmission could be damaged.Be sure to follow all steps ofthe dinghy towing procedure priorto and after towing the vehicle.

Notice: If the vehicle has afour-speed automatictransmission, it can be dinghytowed from the front for unlimitedmiles at 65 mph (105 km/h). Thevehicle could be damaged If65 mph (105 km/h) is exceededwhile towing the vehicle. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Neverexceed 65 mph (105 km/h) whiletowing the vehicle.

Once the destination has beenreached:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

3. Reinstall the 2 amp IGN SW fuseto the instrument panel fuseblock.

4. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF and remove the keyfrom the ignition.

Notice: Too much or toolittle fluid can damage thetransmission. Be sure that thetransmission fluid is at the properlevel before towing with all fourwheels on the ground.

Notice: Do not tow a vehiclewith the front drive wheels on theground if one of the front tiresis a compact spare tire. Towingwith two different tire sizes on thefront of the vehicle can causesevere damage to thetransmission.


Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith the rear wheels on the ground,do the following:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).


4. Clamp the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with aclamping device designedfor towing.

5. Remove the key from theignition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

7. Release the parking brake.

Towing the Vehicle Fromthe Rear

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.


Towing a Trailer

{ CAUTION

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is too heavy,the brakes may not work well — oreven at all. The driver andpassengers could be seriouslyinjured. The vehicle may also bedamaged; the resulting repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Pull a trailer onlyif all the steps in this section havebeen followed. Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailerimproperly can damage thevehicle and result in costlyrepairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice inthis section and see yourdealer/retailer for importantinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer if it isequipped with the proper trailertowing equipment.

To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, read the informationin “Weight of the Trailer” thatappears later in this section.

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important traileringtips and safety rules. Many of theseare important for your safety andthat of your passengers. So pleaseread this section carefully beforepulling a trailer.

Load-pulling components such asthe engine, transmission, rearaxle, wheel assemblies and tires areforced to work harder against thedrag of the added weight. Theengine is required to operateat relatively higher speeds andunder greater loads, generatingextra heat. The trailer alsoadds considerably to windresistance, increasing the pullingrequirements.

The vehicle has Trailer SwayControl (TSC). See “Trailer SwayControl (TSC)” in StabiliTrak®



Pulling A TrailerHere are some important points:

• There are many differentlaws, including speed limitrestrictions, having to do withtrailering. Make sure the rig willbe legal, not only where youlive but also where you will bedriving. A good source forthis information can be state orprovincial police.

• Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 500 miles (800 km) thenew vehicle is driven. Theengine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles(800 km) that a trailer is towed,do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make startsat full throttle. This helps theengine and other parts ofthe vehicle wear in at the heavierloads.

• Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to alower gear if the transmissionshifts too often under heavy loadsand/or hilly conditions.

• Obey speed limit restrictionswhen towing a trailer. Do notdrive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, orno more than 55 mph (90 km/h),to save wear on the vehicle’sparts.

• Do not tow a trailer when theoutside temperature is above100°F (38°C).

Three important considerations haveto do with weight:

• The weight of the trailer

• The weight of the trailer tongue

• The total weight on the vehicle’stires

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than1,500 lbs (680 kg). But eventhat can be too heavy.

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude,road grades, outside temperatureand how much the vehicle is used topull a trailer are all important. Itcan depend on any specialequipment on the vehicle, and theamount of tongue weight the vehiclecan carry. See “Weight of theTrailer Tongue” later in this sectionfor more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

Ask your dealer/retailer for traileringinformation or advice.


Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce thetongue weight the vehicle can carry,which will also reduce the trailerweight the vehicle can tow. If towinga trailer, the tongue load must beadded to the GVW becausethe vehicle will be carrying thatweight, too. See Loading the Vehicleon page 4-18 for more informationabout the vehicle’s maximumload capacity.

For a weight-carrying hitch, thetrailer tongue (A) should weigh10 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B).

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle’s ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannotcause the vehicle to exceed theGVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) or the RGAWR (RearGross Axle Weight Rating).

The effect of additional weightmay reduce the trailering capacitymore than the total of the additionalweight.

Consider the following example:

A vehicle model base weightis 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs(1 270 kg) at the front axle and2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rearaxle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs(1 814 kg) and a GCWR (GrossCombination Weight Rating)of 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). Thetrailer rating should be:

Expect tongue weight to be at least10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs(386 kg)) and because the weightis applied well behind the rear axle,the effect on the rear axle is greaterthan just the weight itself, asmuch as 1.5 times as much.


The weight at the rear axle could be850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs(578 kg). Since the rear axle alreadyweighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is veryclose to, but within the limit forRGAWR as well. The vehicle is set totrailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).

If the vehicle has many options andthere is a front seat passengerand two rear seat passengers withsome luggage and gear in thevehicle as well, 300 lbs (136 kg)could be added to the frontaxle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) tothe rear axle weight. The vehiclenow weighs:

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs(3 266 kg) and you might think 700additional pounds (318 kg) shouldbe subtracted from the traileringcapacity to stay within GCWR limits.

The maximum trailer would only be7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may gofurther and think the tongue weightshould be limited to less than1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoidexceeding GVWR. But the effect onthe rear axle must still be considered.Because the rear axle now weighs3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), 900 lbs(408 kg) can be put on the rear axlewithout exceeding RGAWR. Theeffect of tongue weight is about1.5 times the actual weight. Dividingthe 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leavesonly 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongueweight that can be handled. Sincetongue weight is usually at least10 percent of total loaded trailerweight, expect that the largest trailerthe vehicle can properly handle is6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).

It is important that the vehicledoes not exceed any of itsratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Maximum Trailer Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratings isto weigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle’sTiresBe sure the vehicle’s tires areinflated to the upper limit for coldtires. These numbers can be foundon the Certification label or seeLoading the Vehicle on page 4-18for more information. Make sure notto go over the GVW limit for thevehicle, or the GAWR, including theweight of the trailer tongue.

HitchesIt is important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds,large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons whythe right hitch is needed.

• The rear bumper on the vehicle isnot intended for hitches. Do notattach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.


• Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If so, besure to seal the holes when thehitch is removed. If they are notsealed, deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) from the engine’sexhaust can get into the vehicle.See Engine Exhaust onpage 2-26. Sealing the holes willalso prevent dirt and water fromentering the vehicle.

Safety ChainsAlways attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chainsmay be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailer

manufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendationfor attaching safety chains and donot attach them to the bumper.Always leave just enough slack sothe rig can turn. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesA loaded trailer that weighs morethan 1,000 lbs (900 kg) needsto have its own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjustedand maintained properly. Becausethe vehicle has StabiliTrak®, donot try to tap into the vehicle’shydraulic brake system. If you do,both brake systems will notwork well, or at all.

Driving with a Trailer

{ CAUTION

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-most windowis open.Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.To maximize safety when towinga trailer:

• Have the exhaust systeminspected for leaks and makenecessary repairs beforestarting a trip.

• Never drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.

• Fully open the air outlets on orunder the instrument panel.

(Continued)


CAUTION (Continued)

• Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.


Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Get to knowthe rig before setting out for the openroad. Get acquainted with the feel ofhandling and braking with the addedweight of the trailer. And always keepin mind that the vehicle you aredriving is now longer and not asresponsive as the vehicle is by itself.

Before starting, check all trailerhitch parts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors,lamps, tires and mirror adjustments.

If the trailer has electric brakes,start the vehicle and trailer movingand then apply the trailer brakecontroller by hand to be surethe brakes are working. This checksthe electrical connection at thesame time.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secure,and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behindthe vehicle ahead as you wouldwhen driving the vehicle withouta trailer. This can help to avoidsituations that require heavybraking and sudden turns.

PassingMore passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Becausethe rig is longer, it is necessaryto go much farther beyond thepassed vehicle before returningto the lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. Then, to movethe trailer to the left, move thathand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand tothe right. Always back up slowlyand, if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could causethe trailer to come in contact withthe vehicle. The vehicle couldbe damaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do thisso the trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, treesor other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.


Turn Signals When Towing aTrailerThe arrows on the instrument panelflash whenever signaling a turnor lane change. Properly hooked up,the trailer lamps also flash, tellingother drivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash forturns even if the bulbs on the trailerare burned out. For this reasonyou may think other driversare seeing the signal when they arenot. It is important to checkoccasionally to be sure the trailerbulbs are still working.

Driving on Grades

Notice: Do not tow on steepcontinuous grades exceeding 6miles (9.6 km). Extended,higher than normal engine andtransmission temperaturesmay result and damage thevehicle. Frequent stops are veryimportant to allow the engineand transmission to cool.

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shiftthe transmission to a lower gearif the transmission shifts toooften under heavy loads and/or hillyconditions. Reduce speed andshift to a lower gear before startingdown a long or steep downgrade.If the transmission is not shifteddown, the brakes might have to beused so much that they wouldget hot and no longer work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift downand reduce the vehicle’s speedto around 45 mph (70 km/h)to reduce the possibility of theengine and the transmissionoverheating.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, considerthe following: Engine coolant willboil at a lower temperature than atnormal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle may show signssimilar to engine overheating. Toavoid this, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the automatictransmission in P (Park) for a fewminutes before turning theengine off. If the overheat warningcomes on, see Engine Overheatingon page 5-23.


Parking on Hills

{ CAUTION

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet.Turn the wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into trafficif facing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the regularbrakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake andshift into P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking ona Hill1. Apply and hold the brake pedal

while you:

• Start the engine

• Shift into a gear

• Release the parking brake

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowingThe vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 6-3 for more information.Things that are especially importantin trailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil,axle lubricant, belts, cooling systemand brake system. It is a goodidea to inspect these before andduring the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowingThe cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 5-23.


✍ NOTES


Service andAppearance Care

ServiceService ...............................5-3Accessories andModifications .....................5-3

California Proposition 65Warning ............................5-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements .....5-4

Doing Your OwnService Work ....................5-4

Adding Equipment to theOutside of the Vehicle ......5-4

FuelFuel ....................................5-5Gasoline Octane .................5-5Gasoline Specifications .......5-5California Fuel ....................5-5Additives .............................5-5

Fuels in ForeignCountries ..........................5-6

Filling the Tank ...................5-7Filling a Portable FuelContainer ..........................5-8

Checking Things Underthe HoodChecking Things Underthe Hood ..........................5-9

Hood Release .....................5-9Engine CompartmentOverview .........................5-10

Engine Oil .........................5-11Engine Oil Life System .....5-14Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ...5-15Automatic TransmissionFluid ................................5-17

Cooling System .................5-17Engine Coolant .................5-20Coolant Surge TankPressure Cap ..................5-22

Engine Overheating ...........5-23Windshield WasherFluid ................................5-24

Brakes ..............................5-25Battery ..............................5-27Jump Starting ...................5-28

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming ..............5-33

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement .............5-35Halogen Bulbs ..................5-35Headlamps ........................5-35Front Turn Signal andParking Lamps ................5-36

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps and Back-upLamps .............................5-36

License Plate Lamp ..........5-37Replacement Bulbs ...........5-37

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield Wiper BladeReplacement ...................5-38

Service and Appearance Care 5-1

TiresTires .................................5-38Tire Sidewall Labeling .......5-39Tire Terminology andDefinitions .......................5-41

Inflation - Tire Pressure ....5-43Tire Pressure MonitorSystem ............................5-45

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation ........................5-46

Tire Inspection andRotation ..........................5-50

When It Is Time forNew Tires .......................5-51

Buying New Tires .............5-51Different Size Tires andWheels ............................5-53

Uniform Tire QualityGrading ...........................5-54

Wheel Alignment andTire Balance ....................5-55

Wheel Replacement ..........5-55Tire Chains .......................5-57If a Tire Goes Flat ............5-58

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit ...............5-59

Tire Sealant andCompressor KitStorage ...........................5-66

Appearance CareInterior Cleaning ................5-66Fabric/Carpet ....................5-68Leather .............................5-68Instrument Panel, Vinyl,and Other PlasticSurfaces ..........................5-69

Care of Safety Belts .........5-69Weatherstrips ....................5-69Washing Your Vehicle .......5-69Cleaning ExteriorLamps/Lenses .................5-70

Finish Care .......................5-70Windshield and WiperBlades .............................5-71

Aluminum Wheels .............5-72Tires .................................5-72Sheet Metal Damage ........5-73Finish Damage ..................5-73Underbody Maintenance ....5-73Chemical Paint Spotting ....5-73

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) ..................5-74

Service PartsIdentification Label ...........5-74

Electrical SystemIntermediate VoltageDevices and Wiring .........5-74

Add-On ElectricalEquipment .......................5-75

Windshield Wiper Fuses ....5-75Power Windows andOther Power Options .......5-75

Fuses and CircuitBreakers .........................5-75

Instrument Panel FuseBlock ...............................5-76

Underhood Fuse Block ......5-77

Capacities andSpecificationsCapacities andSpecifications ..................5-81

5-2 Service and Appearance Care

ServiceFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer/retailer. You will receivegenuine Saturn parts andSaturn-trained and supportedservice people.

Genuine Saturn parts have one ofthese marks.

Accessories andModificationsWhen non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories are added to the vehicle,they can affect vehicle performanceand safety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. Some of these accessoriescould even cause malfunction ordamage not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from the installation or useof non-GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, are notcovered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function withother systems on the vehicle.

Your GM dealer/retailer canaccessorize the vehicle usinggenuine GM Accessories. When yougo to your GM dealer/retailer andask for GM Accessories, youwill know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians willperform the work using genuine GMAccessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 1-55.

California Proposition 65WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of Californiato cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems(including some inside the vehicle),many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.


California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inremote keyless transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ CAUTION

Never try to do your own serviceon hybrid components. You canbe injured and the vehicle can bedamaged if you try to do your ownservice work. Service and repairof these hybrid componentsshould only be performed by atrained service technician with theproper knowledge and tools.

{ CAUTION

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience, theproper replacement parts, andtools before attempting anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. English andmetric fasteners can beeasily confused. If the wrongfasteners are used, parts canlater break or fall off. Youcould be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how toservice the vehicle than this manualcan. To order the proper servicemanual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 7-13.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do yourown service work, see ServicingYour Airbag-Equipped Vehicleon page 1-54.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the dateof any service work performed. SeeMaintenance Record on page 6-14.

Adding Equipment tothe Outside of theVehicleThings added to the outside of thevehicle can affect the airflowaround it. This can cause windnoise and can affect fuel economyand windshield washer performance.Check with your dealer/retailerbefore adding equipment tothe outside of the vehicle.


FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean andmaintain optimum vehicleperformance, we recommend theuse of gasoline advertised asTOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, you might notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive,commonly referred to as sparkknock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher assoon as possible. If you are usinggasoline rated at 87 octane or higherand you hear heavy knocking, theengine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specification D 4814 inthe United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5or 3.511 in Canada. Somegasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Additives onpage 5-5 for additional information.

California FuelIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California emissionsstandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission controlsystem performance might beaffected. The malfunction indicatorlamp could turn on and the vehicle

might fail a smog-check test. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 3-30. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer/retailer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowingthe emission control system to workproperly. In most cases, youshould not have to add anything tothe fuel. However, some gasolinescontain only the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves clean, orif the vehicle experiences problemsdue to dirty injectors or valves,look for gasoline that is advertisedas TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.


For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change,can help clean deposits fromfuel injectors and intake valves. GMFuel System Treatment PLUS isthe only gasoline additiverecommended by General Motors.

Also, your dealer/retailer hasadditives that will help correct andprevent most deposit-relatedproblems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol,and reformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing morethan 10% ethanol must not be usedin vehicles that were not designedfor those fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered underthe vehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that are notreformulated for low emissionscan contain an octane-enhancingadditive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask theattendant where you buy gasolinewhether the fuel contains MMT. Werecommend against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containingMMT can reduce the life ofspark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control systemcould be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp might turn on. Ifthis occurs, return to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf you plan on driving in anothercountry outside the United States orCanada, the proper fuel might behard to find. Never use leadedgasoline or any other fuel notrecommended in the previous texton fuel. Costly repairs causedby use of improper fuel would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, askan auto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business inthe country where you will bedriving.


Filling the Tank

{ CAUTION

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the pump island.Turn off the engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you arenear fuel or refueling the vehicle.Do not use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

Unlock the gas cap door by pressingthe door lock switch located onthe driver door trim.

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door onthe driver side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise. The fuelcap has a spring in it; if the capis released too soon, it will springback to the right. To avoid fuelcontact on the painted surface ofthe vehicle when filling the fuel tank,place the tethered cap on the fuelfiller door.

{ CAUTION

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly. Ifyou spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badlyburned. This spray can happen ifthe tank is nearly full, and is morelikely in hot weather. Open thefuel cap slowly and wait for anyhiss noise to stop. Then unscrewthe cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you havefinished pumping before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel frompainted surfaces as soon aspossible. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 5-69.

When replacing the fuel cap, turnit clockwise until it clicks. Makesure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel cap has beenleft off or improperly installed.


This would allow fuel to evaporateinto the atmosphere. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 3-30.

{ CAUTION

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuelcap, be sure to get the right type.Your dealer/ retailer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type,it might not fit properly. This cancause the malfunction indicatorlamp to light and can damage thefuel tank and emissions system.See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 3-30.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ CAUTION

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuel vapor.You can be badly burned and thevehicle damaged if this occurs. Tohelp avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

• Do not fill a container whileit is inside a vehicle, in avehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

• Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.


Checking ThingsUnder the Hood

{ CAUTION

An electric fan under the hood canstart up and injure you even whenthe engine is not running. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ CAUTION

Things that burn can get on hotengine parts and start a fire.These include liquids like fuel, oil,coolant, brake fluid, windshieldwasher and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or otherscould be burned. Be careful not todrop or spill things that will burnonto a hot engine.

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is located under theinstrument panel on the driverside of the vehicle. 2. Then go to the front of the

vehicle and lift up on thesecondary hood release lever.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.Then pull the hood down and closeit firmly.


Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood, you will see the following:


A. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 5-15.

B. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting on page 5-28.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 5-11.

D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. SeeCooling System on page 5-17.

E. Engine Coolant Surge TankProtection Cap. See CoolantSurge Tank Pressure Capon page 5-22.

F. See Underhood Fuse Block onpage 5-77.

G. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting on page 5-28.

H. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-24.

I. Engine Oil Dipstick (out of view).See Engine Oil on page 5-11.

Engine OilChecking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check theengine oil level at each fuel fill. Inorder to get an accurate reading, theoil must be warm and the vehiclemust be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is ayellow loop. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-10 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give theoil several minutes to drain backinto the oil pan. If this is notdone, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull the dipstick and clean it witha paper towel or cloth, then pushit back in all the way. Removeit again, keeping the tip down andcheck the level.


When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the MIN (minimum)mark, add at least one quart/literof the recommended oil. Thissection explains what kind of oil touse. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-81.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.If the engine has so much oilthat the oil level gets above theupper mark that shows the properoperating range, the enginecould be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-10 for the location ofthe engine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all theway back in when through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseLook for three things:


• GM6094M

Use only an oil that meets GMStandard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is best for thevehicle. These numbers on an oilcontainer show its viscosity, orthickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such asSAE 20W-50.

• American Petroleum Institute(API) starburst symbol

Oils meeting these requirementsshould have the starburstsymbol on the container. Thissymbol indicates that the oil hasbeen certified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).

Notice: Use only engine oilidentified as meeting GMStandard GM6094M and showingthe American PetroleumInstitute Certified For GasolineEngines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oilcan result in engine damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.

Cold Temperature OperationIf in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F(−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30engine oil. Both provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. Always usean oil that meets the requiredspecification, GM6094M. See “WhatKind of Engine Oil to Use” formore information.

Engine Oil Additives / EngineOil FlushesDo not add anything to the oil.The recommended oils withthe starburst symbol that meetGM Standard GM6094M are all thatis needed for good performanceand engine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.


Engine Oil Life SystemWhen to Change Engine OilThis vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is based onengine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage.Based on driving conditions,the mileage at which an oil changeis indicated can vary considerably.For the oil life system to workproperly, the system must be resetevery time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated thatoil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A change engine oil lightcomes on. See Change Engine OilLight on page 3-33. Change the oilas soon as possible within the next

600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if driving under the bestconditions, the oil life system mightnot indicate that an oil change isnecessary for over a year. However,the engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and atthis time the system must be reset.Your dealer/retailer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork using genuine parts and resetthe system. It is also important tocheck the oil regularly and keep it atthe proper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must be changedat 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since thelast oil change. Remember to resetthe oil life system whenever the oil ischanged.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife SystemThe Engine Oil Life Systemcalculates when to change theengine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Whenever the oil is changed,reset the system so it can calculatewhen the next oil change isrequired. If a situation occurs wherethe oil is changed prior to achange engine oil light being turnedon, reset the system.

After changing the engine oil, resetthe system:

1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUNwith the engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.If the change engine oil light isnot on, the system is reset.

If the light comes on again andstays on for 30 seconds at the nextignition cycle, it did not reset.The system needs to be reset again.


What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Cleanyour skin and nails with soap andwater, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothingor rags containing used engineoil. See the manufacturer’s warningsabout the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change your ownoil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never disposeof oil by putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Recycleit by taking it to a place that collectsused oil.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-10 for thelocation of the engine aircleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at theMaintenance II intervals and replaceit at the first oil change after each50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval.See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-3 for more information.If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.


How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filterremove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains caked with dirt, a new filteris required.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter, do the following:

1. Remove the clamp on the airduct hose.

2. Disconnect the hose.

3. Remove the four bolts on theside of the air cleaner assembly.

4. Turn the cover upward todisengage the cover hinges.

5. Remove the air cleaner coverassembly and air filter element.

6. Inspect or replace the air filterelement.If the air filter element is dirty,you should replace it. If it is onlydusty, it may be cleaned byblowing compressed air throughit from the clean side.Make sure you are away fromthe engine compartmentwhen cleaning the air filter withcompressed air.Wipe all dust from inside of thehousing and inspect the aircleaner and air outlet duct forcracks, cuts and deterioration.The air outlet duct must bereplaced if damaged.

7. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 toreinstall the engine air cleaner/filter cover and air duct hose.

{ CAUTION

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. If it is not there and theengine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, andbe careful working on the enginewith the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, a backfire can cause adamaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which will damage it. Always havethe air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.


Automatic TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level. A transaxlefluid leak is the only reason forfluid loss. If a leak occurs, take thevehicle to your dealer/retailerservice department and have itrepaired as soon as possible.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in AdditionalRequired Services on page 6-5, andbe sure to use the transaxle fluidlisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-11.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transaxle fluid maydamage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be coveredby your warranty. Always usethe automatic transaxle fluidlisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-11.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift thehood, here is what you will see:

A. Coolant Surge TankB. Pressure Cap

{ CAUTION

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolantsurge tank is boiling, do notdo anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked ona level surface.

The coolant level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX lines. If it isnot, you may have a leak at theradiator hoses, heater hoses,radiator, water pump, or somewhereelse in the cooling system.


{ CAUTION

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, withthe engine on, check to see ifthe electric engine cooling fan isrunning. If the engine is overheating,the fan should be running. If it isnot, your vehicle needs service.Turn off the engine.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 30,000 miles(50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL® (silicate-free)coolant in the vehicle.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If you have not found a problem yet,check to see if coolant is visiblein the surge tank. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not atbetween the MIN and MAX lines,add a 50/50 mixture of clean,

drinkable water and DEX-COOL®

coolant at the coolant surgetank, but be sure the cooling system,including the coolant surge tankpressure cap, is cool before you doit. See Engine Coolant onpage 5-20 for more information.

{ CAUTION

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andcoolant surge tank pressure capto cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.


{ CAUTION

Adding only plain water to thecooling system can be dangerous.Plain water, or some other liquidsuch as alcohol, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The vehicle’s coolant warningsystem is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture, the enginecould get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Theengine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, watercan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core and otherparts. Use the recommendedcoolant and the proper coolantmixture.

{ CAUTION

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. You can remove the coolantsurge tank pressure capwhen the cooling system,including the coolant surge tankpressure cap and upperradiator hose, is no longer hot.Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If you heara hiss, wait for that to stop.This will allow any pressure stillleft to be vented out thedischarge hose.

2. Then keep turning the pressurecap slowly, and remove it.


3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper DEX-COOL® coolantmixture, to between the MINand MAX lines.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start the engineand let it run until you can feelthe upper radiator hosegetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surgetank may be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture tothe coolant surge tank untilthe level reaches between theMIN and MAX lines.

5. Then replace the pressure cap.Be sure the pressure cap ishand-tight.

Check the level in the surgetank when the cooling systemhas cooled down. If the coolantis not at the proper level, repeatSteps 1 through 3 and reinstall thepressure cap. If the coolant stillis not at the proper level when thesystem cools down again, seeyour dealer/retailer.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicleis filled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in your vehicle for five yearsor 150,000 miles (240 000 km),whichever occurs first, if you addonly DEX-COOL® extended lifecoolant.

The following explains your coolingsystem and how to add coolantwhen it is low. If you have a problemwith engine overheating, seeEngine Overheating on page 5-23.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection downto −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to265°F (129°C).


• Protect against rust andcorrosion.

• Help keep the proper enginetemperature.

• Let the warning lights and gageswork as they should.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changingsooner, at the first maintenanceservice after each 30,000 miles(50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL® (silicate-free)coolant in the vehicle.

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean,drinkable water and one-halfDEX-COOL® coolant which will notdamage aluminum parts. If youuse this coolant mixture, you do notneed to add anything else.

{ CAUTION

Adding only plain water to thecooling system can be dangerous.Plain water, or some other liquidsuch as alcohol, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The vehicle’s coolant warningsystem is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture, the enginecould get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Theengine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, andother parts.

If you have to add coolant morethan four times a year, haveyour dealer/retailer check yourcooling system.

Notice: If extra inhibitors and/oradditives are used in thevehicle’s cooling system, thevehicle could be damaged. Useonly the proper mixture ofthe engine coolant listed in thismanual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-11 formore information.


Checking Coolant

The surge tank is located onthe driver side of the enginecompartment. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-10 for more informationon location.

{ CAUTION

Turning the surge tank pressurecap when the engine and radiatorare hot can allow steam andscalding liquids to blow out andburn you badly. Never turn thesurge tank pressure cap — evena little — when the engine andradiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface. When your engine is cold,the coolant level should bebetween the MIN and MAX lines.

Adding Coolant

If you need more coolant, add theproper DEX-COOL® coolant mixtureat the surge tank, but only whenthe engine is cool. See CoolingSystem on page 5-17 for instructionson “How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank”.

{ CAUTION

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycol,and it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap,make sure it is hand-tight andfully seated.

Coolant Surge TankPressure CapNotice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant lossand possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap isproperly and tightly secured.

If you need to replace your coolantsurge tank pressure cap, seeyour retailer.


Engine OverheatingThere is a coolant temperaturewarning light on your vehicle’sinstrument panel. See EngineCoolant Temperature Warning Lighton page 3-29.

If Steam Is Coming From YourEngine

{ CAUTION

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before youopen the hood.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

If you keep driving when yourengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engineis cool.

Notice: If the engine catches firebecause of being driven withno coolant, your vehicle can bebadly damaged. The costlyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineIf you get an engine overheatwarning, but see or hear no steam,the problem may not be too serious.Sometimes the engine can get a littletoo hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning withno sign of steam, try this for aminute or so:

1. If you have an air conditionerand it is on, turn it off.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot atthe highest fan speed and openthe windows as necessary.

3. Try to minimize engine load.If you are in a traffic jam,shift to N (Neutral); otherwise,shift to the highest gear possiblewhile driving.


If you no longer have the overheatwarning, you can drive. Just tobe safe, drive slower for aboutten minutes. If the warning doesnot come back on, you can drivenormally.

If the warning continues and youhave not stopped, pull over, stop,and park your vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idlethe engine for three minuteswhile you are parked. If the warningcontinues, turn off the engine andget everyone out of the vehicle untilit cools down.

You may decide not to lift the hoodbut to get service help right away.

Windshield Washer FluidWhat to UseWhen you need windshield or rearwindow washer fluid, be sure toread the manufacturer’s instructionsbefore use. If you will be operatingyour vehicle in an area wherethe temperature may fall belowfreezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Windshield WasherFluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-10 for reservoir location.

Notice:

• When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage yourwasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs,which could damage the tank ifit is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in your windshieldwasher. It can damage thevehicle’s windshield washersystem and paint.


BrakesBrake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with either DOT-3 or DOT-4brake fluid as indicated on thereservoir cap. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-10 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:

• The brake fluid level goes downbecause of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulicsystem can also cause a low fluidlevel. Have the brake hydraulicsystem fixed, since a leak meansthat sooner or later the brakes willnot work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid. Addingfluid does not correct a leak. If fluid isadded when the linings are worn,there will be too much fluid when newbrake linings are installed. Add orremove brake fluid, as necessary,only when work is done on the brakehydraulic system.

{ CAUTION

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 3-27.

What to Add

If the vehicle has DOT-3 brake fluid,as indicated on the reservoir cap,use only new DOT-3 brake fluid froma sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-11.

If the vehicle has DOT-4 brake fluid,as indicated on the reservoir cap,use only new DOT-4 brake fluid froma sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-11. DOT-4brake fluid requires the brakehydraulic system to be flushed andrefilled with new DOT-4 brakefluid at a regular maintenanceservice every two years. SeeAdditional Required Services onpage 6-5.


Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from enteringthe reservoir.

{ CAUTION

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brake hydraulicsystem parts. For example,just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system can damagebrake hydraulic systemparts so badly that they willhave to be replaced. Do not letsomeone put in the wrongkind of fluid.

• If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle’s painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on the vehicle.If you do, wash it offimmediately. See WashingYour Vehicle on page 5-69.

Brake WearThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brakepads are worn and new pads areneeded. The sound can comeand go or be heard all the time thevehicle is moving, except whenapplying the brake pedal firmly.

{ CAUTION

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toan accident. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads couldresult in costly brake repair.Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal whenthe brakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help preventbrake pulsation. When tires arerotated, inspect brake pads for wearand evenly tighten wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-81.Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brakepedal does not return to normalheight, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be asign that brake service mightbe required.


Brake AdjustmentEvery time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehiclemoving, the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake SystemPartsThe braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have tobe of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to havereally good braking. The vehicle wasdesigned and tested with top-qualitybrake parts. When parts of thebraking system are replaced — forexample, when the brake liningswear down and new ones areinstalled — be sure to get newapproved replacement parts. Ifthis is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,if someone puts in brake liningsthat are wrong for the vehicle, thebalance between the front and

rear brakes can change — for theworse. The braking performanceexpected can change in many otherways if the wrong replacementbrake parts are installed.

Battery

{ CAUTION

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Startingon page 5-28 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals,and related accessories containlead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer andreproductive harm. Wash handsafter handling.

This vehicle has a standard 12-voltbattery and a 36-volt hybridbattery system.

12-Volt BatteryWhen a new standard 12-voltbattery is needed, see yourdealer/retailer for one that has thereplacement number shown onthe original battery’s label.

36-Volt Battery SystemIf a new 36-volt hybrid batterysystem is needed, see yourdealer/retailer.

Vehicle StorageInfrequent Usage: If the vehicle isdriven infrequently, remove the12-volt battery black, negative (−)cable from the battery, the one thatis exposed. This helps keep thebattery from running down.


Extended Storage: For extendedstorage of the vehicle, remove the12-volt battery black, negative (−)cable from the battery or use abattery trickle charger. This helpsmaintain the charge of the batteryover an extended period of time.

Remember to reconnect the batterywhen ready to drive the vehicle.

Notice: The 36-volt hybridbattery system should beserviced only by a qualifiedfacility to avoid battery systemdamage. See your dealer/retailer ifservice is needed.

Notice: If the vehicle is notdriven for over two months, the36-volt hybrid battery can bepermanently damaged.

The 36-volt battery is located behindthe rear seat, under the cargofloor. If the vehicle is stored for anextended period of time, drivethe vehicle every two months forabout half an hour to keep the36-volt hybrid battery charged andin good working condition.

Jump StartingThe hybrid vehicle has a standard12-volt battery in the enginecompartment, and a 36-volt batteryunder the rear load floor.

{ CAUTION

Personal injury or damage to thevehicle can result if you try jumpstarting or using a battery chargeron the 36-volt battery. Use onlythe 12-volt battery for jumpstarting and charging.

If your vehicle’s standard 12-voltbattery has run down, you may wantto use another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the followingsteps to do it safely.

{ CAUTION

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

• They contain acid that canburn you.

• They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

• They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.


Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will not work,and it could damage the vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. Itmust have a 12-volt battery witha negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’ssystem is not a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Onlyuse vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jumpstart your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough sothe jumper cables can reach, butbe sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are, itcould cause a ground connectionyou do not want. You would notbe able to start your vehicle, andthe bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) ora manual transmission inN (Neutral) before setting theparking brake.

Notice: If you leave the radio orother accessories on duringthe jump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn offthe radio and other accessorieswhen jump starting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlet. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are not needed.This will avoid sparks and helpsave both batteries. And it couldsave the radio!

4. Open each vehicle’s hood andlocate the positive (+) andnegative (−) terminal locations ofthe other vehicle. Your vehiclehas a remote positive (+) 12-voltjump starting terminal (B) anda remote negative (−) jumpstarting terminal (A). You shouldalways use these remoteterminals instead of the terminalson the battery. The remotepositive (+) terminal is locatedinside the junction box locatedabove the engine cover. Toaccess the remote positive (+)terminal, unlatch the box cover.


A. Remote Negative (-)B. Remote Positive (+)


5. The remote negative (−) terminalis a stud on the driver side nearthe underhood fuse block.

{ CAUTION

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded. Usea flashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it islow, add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ CAUTION

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ CAUTION

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

6. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too. Before youconnect the cables to the othervehicle, here are some basicthings you should know.Positive (+) will go to positive (+)or to a remote positiveterminal (+) if the vehicle has one.Negative (−) will go to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or toa remote negative (−) terminal, ifthe vehicle has one. Do notconnect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get a shortthat would damage the batteryand maybe other parts too.

7. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the remote positive (+)terminal of your hybrid vehicle.

8. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the othervehicle has one.


9. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one. Donot let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to your vehicle’sremote negative (−) terminal. Theelectrical connection is just asgood there, and the chance ofsparks getting back to the batteryis much less.

10. Try to start the hybrid vehicle.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables do nottouch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−)cable from the vehicle that hadthe dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Close the remote positivejunction box cover.

Jumper Cable Removal


Headlamp AimingThe headlamp aiming system hasbeen preset at the factory.

If the vehicle is damaged in anaccident, the aim of the headlampsmay be affected and adjustmentmay be necessary.

It is recommended that adealer/retailer adjust the headlamps.To re-aim the headlamps yourself,use the following procedure.

The vehicle should be properlyprepared as follows:

• The vehicle should be placed sothe headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m)from a light colored wall.

• The vehicle must have all fourtires on a level surface whichis level all the way to the wall.

• The vehicle should be placed soit is perpendicular to the wall orother flat surface.

• The vehicle should not have anysnow, ice, or mud on it.

• The vehicle should be fullyassembled and all otherwork stopped while headlampaiming is being performed.

• The vehicle should benormally loaded with a fulltank of fuel and one person or160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on thedriver’s seat.

• Tires should be properly inflated.

Headlamp aiming is done withthe vehicle’s low-beam headlamps.The high-beam headlamps willbe correctly aimed if the low-beamheadlamps are aimed properly.

To adjust the vertical aim, do thefollowing:

1. Open the hood. See HoodRelease on page 5-9 formore information.

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens ofthe low-beam headlamp.

3. Measure the distance from theground to the aim dot on thelow-beam headlamp. Record thedistance.


4. At the wall measure from theground upward (A) to therecorded distance from Step 3and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)on the wall the width of thevehicle at the height of the markin Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlampto improve beam cut-off whenaiming. Covering a headlamp maycause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to theheadlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beam headlampsand place a piece of cardboardor equivalent in front of theheadlamp not being adjusted.This allows only the beam of lightfrom the headlamp beingadjusted to be seen on the flatsurface.

7. Locate the vertical headlampaiming screws, which areunder the hood near eachheadlamp assembly.The adjustment screw can beturned with a E8 Torx® socket.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screwuntil the headlamp beam isaimed to the horizontal tape line.Turn it clockwise orcounterclockwise to raise orlower the angle of the beam.

9. Make sure that the light from theheadlamp is positioned at thebottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on the left (A)shows the correct headlamp aim.The lamp on the right (B) showsthe incorrect headlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 forthe opposite headlamp.


Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbson page 5-37.

For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer/retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ CAUTION

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

HeadlampsTo replace one of the headlampbulbs, use the following procedure.To replace the parking/turn signallamp bulb, see Front Turn Signaland Parking Lamps on page 5-36.

1. Open the hood. See HoodRelease on page 5-9 formore information.

2. Remove the two screws from thetop of the front fascia and grille.They are inboard of theheadlamp assembly.

3. Remove the three screwsretaining the headlamp assembly.

4. Insert a flat blade tool through theopening in the top. Make sure thetool fits through the opening in theheadlamp bracket lower arm.

5. Push the locking tab towardthe rear of the vehicle with thetool to lift the headlamp bracketlower arm.

6. Pull back on the front fascia andthen pull the headlamp assemblyout from the vehicle. Anotherperson might be needed to assistwith this step.

7. Disconnect the electricalconnector from the bulbassembly.

8. Turn the bulb assemblycounterclockwise to remove itfrom the housing.

9. Replace the old bulb with anew one.

10. Reverse Steps 1 through 8 toreinstall.


Front Turn Signal andParking LampsTo replace a front turn signal orparking lamp bulb:

1. Follow Steps 1 through 6 underHeadlamps on page 5-35 toaccess the front turn signal orparking lamp.

2. Turn the bulb to be replacedcounterclockwise to removeit from the headlamp assembly.

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulbsocket assembly.

4. Push the new bulb into the bulbsocket assembly.

5. Insert the bulb assembly into theheadlamp assembly.

6. Turn the bulb assemblyclockwise until seated.

7. Reverse the steps to reinstall theheadlamp assembly.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps and Back-upLampsTo replace one of these bulbs:

A. Taillamp/StoplampB. Turn Signal LampC. Back-up Lamp


1. Open the liftgate.

2. Remove the two screws holdingin the taillamp assembly.

3. Slide the taillamp assemblyrearward and away from thevehicle.

4. Turn the bulb socket beingreplaced counterclockwiseto disconnect it.

5. Pull the bulb out of the bulbsocket.

6. Push the new bulb into thebulb socket.

7. Reverse Steps 2 through 4 toreinstall the taillamp assembly.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws holdingeach of the license plate lampsto the fascia.

2. Turn and pull the license platelamp forward through thefascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.

4. Push the new bulb into the bulbsocket and turn it clockwise tolock it into place.

5. Push and turn the license plateback through the fascia opening.

6. Reinstall the two screws holdingthe license plate lamps to thefascia.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp BulbNumber

Back-up Lamp 3156Front TurnSignal/Parking 3157K

Headlamps

High-beam 9005 orHB3

Low-beam/DRL 9006 orHB4

Rear Turn Signal,Stoplamp andTaillamp

3057

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer/retailer.


Windshield WiperBlade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-3 for more information.Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For proper typeand length, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 6-12.To replace the windshield wiperblade:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. Push the release lever (B) todisengage the hook and push thewiper arm (A) out of the blade (C).

3. Push the new wiper bladesecurely on the wiper arm untilyou hear the release lever clickinto place.

To replace the rear wiper blade, liftthe rear wiper arm from thewindow and pull the blade.

TiresYour new vehicle comes withhigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. If youever have questions about yourtire warranty and where to obtainservice, see your vehicleWarranty booklet for details.For additional information referto the tire manufacturer.

{ CAUTION

Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

• Overloading yourvehicle’s tires can causeoverheating as a resultof too much flexing. Youcould have an air-out anda serious accident. SeeLoading the Vehicle onpage 4-18.

(Continued)


CAUTION (Continued)

• Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting accident couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires arecold. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43.

• Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenyou hit a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

• Worn, old tires can causeaccidents. If the tire’s treadis badly worn, or if yourvehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexample below shows a typicalpassenger (p-metric) tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire’s width, height,aspect ratio, constructiontype, and service description.

See the “Tire Size” illustrationlater in this section for moredetail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM’s specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that the tireis in compliance with the U.S.Department of TransportationMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured.

Passenger (P-Metric) TireExample


The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, althoughonly one side may have the dateof manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of pliesin the sidewall and underthe tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 5-54.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Tire SizeThe following illustrationshows an example of a typicalpassenger (p-metric) vehicletire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric)Tire: The United States versionof a metric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U. S. Tireand Rim Association.(B) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tiresection width in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.

For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter B meansbelted-bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadrange and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carry capacity a tire iscertified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. Thespeed rating is the maximumspeed a tire is certified to carrya load. Speed ratings rangefrom A to Z.


Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in pounds per squareinch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This meansthe combined weight ofoptional accessories. Someexamples of optionalaccessories are, automatictransmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows,power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire’s height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located between theplies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in pounds persquare inch (psi) or kilopascals(kPa) before a tire has builtup heat from driving. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-43.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standardand optional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel,oil, and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, and dateof production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Loading the Vehicleon page 4-18.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeLoading the Vehicle onpage 4-18.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeLoading the Vehicle onpage 4-18.


Intended OutboardSidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that mustalways face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucksand some multipurposepassenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum InflationPressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire canbe inflated. The maximum airpressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by150 lbs (68 kg). See Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-18.

OccupantDistribution: Designatedseating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tirethat has a particular sidethat faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle. The sideof the tire that contains awhitewall, bears white lettering,or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding thatis higher or deeper than thesame moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendedtire inflation pressure asshown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-43 and Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-18.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cordsthat extend to the beads are laidat 90 degrees to the centerlineof the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tirebeads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumericcode assigned to a tireindicating the maximum speedat which a tire can operate.


Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires onpage 5-51.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturersusing government testingprocedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of thetire. See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 5-54.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.See Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-18.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individualtire due to curb weight,accessory weight, occupantweight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehicle’scapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” underLoading the Vehicle onpage 4-18.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amountof air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tellyou that under-inflation orover-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not haveenough air (under-inflation),you can get the following:• Too much flexing• Too much heat• Tire overloading• Premature or irregular wear• Poor handling• Reduced fuel economyIf your tires have too much air(over-inflation), you can getthe following:• Unusual wear• Poor handling• Rough ride• Needless damage from road

hazards

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to your vehicle.


This label shows your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires andthe correct inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amountof air pressure needed tosupport your vehicle’s maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weightyour vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-18. Howyou load your vehicle affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check your tires once a monthor more.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegage to check tire pressure.You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even whenthey are under-inflated. Checkthe tire’s inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. Cold meansyour vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven nomore than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap fromthe tire valve stem. Press the tiregage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.

If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure islow, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release airby pushing on the metal stem inthe center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks bykeeping out dirt and moisture.


Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your vehicle’s tiresand transmit tire pressure readings toa receiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated to theinflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is nota substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correcttire pressure, even if under-inflationhas not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicatoris combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the

system detects a malfunction, thetelltale will flash for approximatelyone minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated. Thissequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system maynot be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tiresor wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioningproperly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacingone or more tires or wheels on yourvehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continueto function properly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 5-46 foradditional information.


Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry and Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) operates on a radiofrequency and complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:



The TPMS operates on a radiofrequency and complies withRSS-210 of Industry and ScienceCanada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:




Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warnthe driver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensorsare mounted onto each tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe vehicle’s tires and transmitsthe tire pressure readings toa receiver located in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure condition isdetected, the TPMS turns on the lowtire pressure warning light located onthe instrument panel cluster.


At the same time a message tocheck the pressure in a specific tireappears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) display. The low tirepressure warning light and the DICwarning message come on at eachignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed by thedriver. For additional information anddetails about the DIC operation anddisplays see DIC Operation andDisplays on page 3-36 and DICWarnings and Messages onpage 3-42.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weatherwhen the vehicle is first started, andthen turn off as you start to drive.This could be an early indicator thatthe air pressure in the tire(s) aregetting low and need to be inflatedto the proper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires andthe correct inflation pressure foryour vehicle’s tires when theyare cold. See Loading the Vehicleon page 4-18, for an example of theTire and Loading Informationlabel and its location on yourvehicle. Also see Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43.

Your vehicle’s TPMS system canwarn you about a low tire pressurecondition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See TireInspection and Rotation onpage 5-50 and Tires on page 5-38.

Notice: Using non-approved tiresealants could damage theTire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use the GM approvedtire sealant available through yourdealer/retailer.

Your vehicle, when new, included afactory-installed Tire Inflator Kit.This kit uses a GM approved liquidtire sealant. Using non-approvedtire sealants could damage theTPMS sensors. See Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit for informationregarding the inflator kit materialsand instructions.


TPMS Malfunction Light andMessageThe TPMS will not function properly ifone or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message isalso displayed. The low tire warninglight and DIC warning messagecome on at each ignition cycle untilthe problem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause themalfunction light and DIC messageto come on are:

• The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was started but notcompleted or not completedsuccessfully after rotating thevehicle’s tires. The DIC messageand TPMS malfunction lightshould go off once the TPMSsensor matching process isperformed successfully. See“TPMS Sensor Matching Process”later in this section.

• One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. The DICmessage and the TPMSmalfunction light should gooff when the TPMS sensorsare installed and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer/retailer for service.

• Replacement tires or wheels donot match your vehicle’s originalequipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than thoserecommended for your vehiclecould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 5-51.

• Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning itcannot detect or signal a low tirecondition. See your dealer/retailer forservice if the TPMS malfunction lightand DIC message comes on andstays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcessEach TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. Any timeyou replace one or more of theTPMS sensors or rotate thevehicle’s tires, the identificationcodes need to be matched to thenew tire/wheel location. The sensorsare matched, to the tire/wheellocations, in the following order:driver side front tire, passenger sidefront tire, passenger side reartire, and driver side rear tire using aTPMS diagnostic tool. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

The TPMS sensors can also bematched to each tire/wheel positionby increasing or decreasing thetire’s air pressure. When increasingthe tire’s pressure, do not exceedthe maximum inflation pressureindicated on the tire’s sidewall. Todecrease the tire’s air-pressureuse the pointed end of the valvecap, a pencil-style air pressuregage, or a key.


You have two minutes to matcheach tire and wheel position.If it takes longer than two minutes tomatch any tire and wheel position,the matching process stops and youneed to start over.

The TPMS matching process isoutlined below:


2. Turn the ignition switch toON/RUN with the engine off.

3. Press and hold the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’sLOCK and UNLOCK buttons,at the same time, for aboutfive seconds to start the TPMSlearn mode. The horn soundstwice indicating the TPMSreceiver is ready and inlearn mode.

4. Start with the driver side fronttire. The driver side front turnsignal also comes on to indicatethat corner’s sensor is readyto be learned.

5. Remove the valve cap from thetire’s valve stem. Activate theTPMS sensor by increasingor decreasing the tire’s airpressure for about eight seconds.The horn chirp, can take up to30 seconds to sound. Itchirps one time and then all theturn signals flash one time toconfirm the sensor identificationcode has been matched tothe tire/wheel position.

6. The passenger side front turnsignal comes on to indicatethat corner sensor is ready to belearned. Proceed to thepassenger side front tire andrepeat the procedure in Step 5.

7. The passenger side rearturn signal comes on to indicatethat corner sensor is ready tobe learned. Proceed to thepassenger side rear tire andrepeat the procedure in Step 5.

8. The driver side rear turn signalcomes on to indicate thatcorner sensor is ready to be

learned. Proceed to the driverside rear tire, and repeatthe procedure in Step 5.

9. After hearing the single hornchirp for the driver side reartire, two additional horn chirpssound to indicate the tire learningprocess is done. Turn theignition switch to LOCK/OFF.If no tires are learned afterentering the TPMS learn mode,or if communication with thereceiver stops, or if the time limithas expired, turn the ignitionswitch to LOCK/OFF andstart over beginning with Step 2.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressure levelas indicated on the Tire andLoading Information label.

11. Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems.


Tire Inspection andRotationWe recommend that youregularly inspect the vehicle’stires, including the spare tire, forsigns of wear or damage.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 5-51 for moreinformation.

Tires should be rotated every5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to13 000 km). See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-3.

The purpose of a regular tirerotation is to achieve a uniformwear for all tires on thevehicle. This will ensure that thevehicle continues to performmost like it did when thetires were new.

Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels.

See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 5-51 andWheel Replacement onpage 5-55.

When rotating the vehicle’s tires,always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

After the tires have been rotated,adjust the front and rear inflationpressures as shown on the Tireand Loading Information label.See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-43 and Loading theVehicle on page 4-18.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 5-46.

Make certain that all wheelnuts are properly tightened. See“Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 5-81.

{ CAUTION

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or onthe parts to which it isfastened, can make wheelnuts become loose after atime. The wheel could comeoff and cause a crash. Whenyou change a wheel, removeany rust or dirt from placeswhere the wheel attaches tothe vehicle. In an emergency,you can use a cloth or a papertowel to do this; but be sure touse a scraper or wire brushlater, if you need to, to get allthe rust or dirt off.


When It Is Time for NewTiresVarious factors, such asmaintenance, temperatures, drivingspeeds, vehicle loading, androad conditions influence when youneed new tires.

One way to tell when it is time fornew tires is to check the treadwearindicators, which will appearwhen the tires have only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.

You need new tires if any of thefollowing statements are true:

• You can see the indicators atthree or more places aroundthe tire.

• You can see cord or fabricshowing through the tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked,cut, or snagged deep enough toshow cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, orother damage that cannot berepaired well because of the sizeor location of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades overtime, even if they are not beingused. This is also true for the sparetire, if the vehicle has one. Multipleconditions affect how fast thisaging takes place, includingtemperatures, loading conditions,and inflation pressure maintenance.

With proper care and maintenancetires typically wear out beforethey degrade due to age. If you areunsure about the need to replacethe tires as they get older, consultthe tire manufacturer for moreinformation.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for your vehicle.The original equipment tires installedon your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC spec) systemrating. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends thatyou get tires with the same TPCSpec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires thatare designed to give the sameperformance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the originaltires.


GM’s exclusive TPC Spec systemconsiders over a dozen criticalspecifications that impact the overallperformance of your vehicle,including brake system performance,ride and handling, traction control,and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire’ssidewall near the tire size. If the tireshave an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will befollowed by a MS, for mud andsnow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling onpage 5-39 for additional information.

GM recommends replacing tiresin sets of four. This is becauseuniform tread depth on all tires willhelp keep your vehicle performingmost like it did when the tireswere new. Replacing less than a fullset of tires can affect the braking

and handling performance of yourvehicle. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on page 5-50 forinformation on proper tire rotation.

{ CAUTION

Mixing tires could cause youto lose control while driving. Ifyou mix tires of different sizes,brands, or types (radial andbias-belted tires) the vehiclemay not handle properly, andyou could have a crash. Usingtires of different sizes, brands,or types may also causedamage to your vehicle. Besure to use the correct size,brand, and type of tires onyour vehicle’s wheels.

{ CAUTION

If you use bias-ply tires on thevehicle, the wheel rim flangescould develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could failsuddenly, causing a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’stires with those that do not have aTPC Spec number, make sure theyare the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radialand bias-belted tires) as yourvehicle’s original tires.


Vehicles that have a tire pressuremonitoring system could give aninaccurate low-pressure warning ifnon-TPC Spec rated tires areinstalled on your vehicle. Non-TPCSpec rated tires may give alow-pressure warning that is higheror lower than the proper warninglevel you would get with TPC Specrated tires. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 5-45.

Your vehicle’s original equipmenttires are listed on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeLoading the Vehicle on page 4-18,for more information about theTire and Loading Information labeland its location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are adifferent size than your originalequipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle haselectronic systems such as, anti-lockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and stability control,the performance of these systemscan be affected.

{ CAUTION

If you add different sized wheels,your vehicle may not provide anacceptable level of performanceand safety if tires notrecommended for those wheelsare selected. You may increasethe chance that you will crash andsuffer serious injury. Only useSaturn specific wheel and tiresystems developed for yourvehicle, and have them properlyinstalled by a Saturn certifiedtechnician.

See Buying New Tires on page 5-51and Accessories and Modificationson page 5-3 for additionalinformation.


Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on thetire sidewall between treadshoulder and maximum sectionwidth. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not apply todeep tread, winter-type snowtires, space-saver, or temporaryuse spare tires, tires with nominal

rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1.5) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differencesin road characteristics andclimate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highestto lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavementas measured under controlledconditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

{WARNING

The traction grade assigned tothis tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.


Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades areA (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistanceto the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can causethe material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life,and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds toa level of performance which allpassenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

{WARNING

The temperature grade for thistire is established for a tirethat is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessivespeed, underinflation, orexcessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination,can cause heat buildup andpossible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment andTire BalanceThe tires and wheels on yourvehicle were aligned and balancedcarefully at the factory to giveyou the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regular

basis. However, if you noticeunusual tire wear or your vehiclepulling to one side or the other, thealignment might need to bechecked. If you notice your vehiclevibrating when driving on asmooth road, the tires and wheelsmight need to be rebalanced.See your dealer/retailer for properdiagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced. If thewheel leaks air, replace it (exceptsome aluminum wheels, whichcan sometimes be repaired). Seeyour dealer/retailer if any ofthese conditions exist.


Your dealer/retailer will know thekind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset and bemounted the same way as theone it replaces.

{ CAUTION

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nutson your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires lose airand make you lose control. Youcould have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

If you need to replace any of yourwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts, replace them only with newSaturn original equipment parts.This way, you will be sure to havethe right wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

Notice: The wrong wheelcan also cause problems withbearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometercalibration, headlamp aim,bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire clearanceto the body and chassis.

{ CAUTION

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or onthe parts to which it isfastened, can make wheelnuts become loose after atime. The wheel could comeoff and cause a crash. Whenyou change a wheel, removeany rust or dirt from placeswhere the wheel attaches tothe vehicle. In an emergency,you can use a cloth or a papertowel to do this; but be sure touse a scraper or wire brushlater, if you need to, to get allthe rust or dirt off.

{ CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on studsor the threads of the wheel nuts.If you do, the wheel nuts mightcome loose and the wheel couldfall off, causing a crash.


{ CAUTION

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can causethe wheel to become loose andeven come off. This could lead to acrash. Be sure to use the correctwheel nuts. If you have to replacethem, be sure to get new Saturnoriginal equipment wheel nuts.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and tothe proper torque specification.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ CAUTION

Putting a used wheel on yourvehicle is dangerous. You cannotknow how it has been used orhow far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause acrash. If you have to replace awheel, use a new Saturn originalequipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{ CAUTION

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension or other vehicle parts.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and you orothers may be injured in a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on thevehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer’s instructions. Tohelp avoid damage to the vehicle,drive slowly, readjust or removethe device if it is contacting thevehicle, and do not spin thevehicle’s wheels. If you do findtraction devices that will fit, installthem on the front tires.


If a Tire Goes FlatThis vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit. See Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit on page 5-59.There is no spare tire, no tirechanging equipment, and no placeto store a tire.

It is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile you are driving, especiallyif you maintain your tires properly.See Tires on page 5-38. If airgoes out of a tire, it is much morelikely to leak out slowly. But, ifyou should ever have a blow out,here are a few tips about whatto expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire willcreate a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your footoff the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop well out of thetraffic lane.

A rear blow out, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skidand may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In anyrear blow out, remove your foot fromthe accelerator pedal. Get thevehicle under control by steering theway you want the vehicle to go. Itmay be very bumpy and noisy,but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road ifpossible.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place and stopping.

1. Turn on the hazard warningflashers. See Hazard WarningFlashers on page 3-5.

2. Park the vehicle. Set the parkingbrake firmly and put the shiftlever in P (Park). See ShiftingInto Park on page 2-23.

3. Turn off the engine.

4. Inspect the flat tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a puncture larger than a1⁄4 inch (6 mm), the tire is tooseverely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 7-5.

If the tire has a puncture less than a1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the tread areaof the tire, see Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit on page 5-59.


Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ CAUTION

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 2-26.

{ CAUTION

Over-inflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealantand compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do notexceed the recommendedpressure.

{ CAUTION

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or other equipmentin the passenger compartment ofthe vehicle could cause injury. Ina sudden stop or collision, looseequipment could strike someone.Store the tire sealant andcompressor kit in its originallocation.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may notbe a place to store a tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in thetread area of the tire. It can also beused to inflate an under inflated tire.


If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tireis too severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 7-5.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.

The kit includes:

A. Air CompressorB. Tire Sealant CanisterC. Power PlugD. On/Off ButtonE. Pressure GageF. Air Only Hose (Black)G. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)

Tire SealantRead and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adheredto the sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister.The sealant canister should bereplaced before its expiration date.Replacement sealant canistersare available at your localdealer/retailer. See “Removal andInstallation of the Sealant Canister”following.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See“Removal and Installation ofthe Sealant Canister” following.


Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit toTemporarily Seal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for 5 minutes.This will help to inflate the tire faster.

Always do a safety check first. SeeIf a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-58.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit Storage onpage 5-66.Make sure the on/off button (D)is in the off (O) position.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)and the power plug (C).

3. Place the kit on the ground.Make sure the tire valvestem is positioned close to theground so the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem cap fromthe flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)onto the tire valve stem. Turnit clockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (C) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all itemsfrom other accessory poweroutlets. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 3-16.If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while usingthe air compressor.


8. Press the on/off (D) button toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.The pressure gage (E) will initiallyshow a high pressure while thecompressor pushes the sealantinto the tire. Once the sealant iscompletely dispersed into the tire,the pressure will quickly drop andstart to rise again as the tireinflates with air only.

9. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflation pressureusing the pressure gage (E).The recommended inflationpressure can be found on theTire and Loading Informationlabel. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43.

The pressure gage (E) may readhigher than the actual tirepressure while the compressor ison. Turn the compressor off toget an accurate pressurereading. The compressor may beturned on/off until the correctpressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 7-5.

10. Press the on/off button (D) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air untilthe vehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire,therefore, Steps 11 through 17must be done immediatelyafter Step 10.Be careful while handling the tiresealant and compressor kit as itcould be warm after usage.

11. Unplug the power plug (C) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

12. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

13. Replace the tire valvestem cap.


14. Replace the sealant/air hose (F),and the power plug (C) back intheir original location.

15. If the flat tire was able to inflateto the recommended inflationpressure, remove the maximumspeed label from the sealantcanister (B) and place itin a highly visible location.The label is a reminder not toexceed 55 mph (90 km/h)until the damaged tire isrepaired or replaced.

16. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location inthe vehicle.

17. Immediately drive the vehicle5 miles (8 km) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

18. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure.Refer to Steps 1 through 11under “Using the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire(Not Punctured).”If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 10 psi (68 kPa) belowthe recommended inflationpressure, stop driving thevehicle. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealantcannot seal the tire. SeeRoadside Assistance Programon page 7-5.If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 10 psi(68 kPa) from the recommendedinflation pressure, inflate thetire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

19. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire or vehicle.

20. Dispose of the used sealantcanister (B) and sealant/airhose (F) assembly at alocal dealer/retailer or inaccordance with local statecodes and practices.

21. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from yourdealer/retailer.

22. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take the vehicleto an authorized dealer/retailerwithin a 100 miles (161 km)of driving to have the tirerepaired or replaced.


Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured)To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:

Always do a safety check first. SeeIf a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-58.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit Storage onpage 5-66.

2. Unlock the air only hose (F) fromthe sealant canister (B) bypulling up on the lever.

3. Pull the air only hose (F) fromthe sealant canister (B).

4. Remove the power plug (C) fromthe air compressor (A).

5. Place the kit on the ground.Make sure the tire valvestem is positioned close to theground so the hose will reach it.

6. Remove the tire valve stem capby turning it counterclockwise.

7. Attach the air only hose (F) ontothe tire valve stem and press thelever down to secure it.

8. Plug the power plug (C) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all itemsfrom other accessory poweroutlets. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 3-16.If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

9. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while usingthe air compressor.

10. Press the on/off (D) button toturn the compressor on.The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

11. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflation pressureusing the pressure gage (E).The recommended inflationpressure can be found on theTire and Loading Informationlabel. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43.The pressure gage (E) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressoroff to get an accurate reading.The compressor may beturned on/off until the correctpressure is reached.


12. Press the on/off button (D) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.Be careful while handling the tiresealant and compressor kit as itcould be warm after usage.

13. Unplug the power plug (C) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

14. Disconnect the air only hose (F)from the tire valve stem, byturning it counterclockwise, andreplace the tire valve stem cap.

15. Replace the air only hose (F)and the power plug (C) back inits original location.

16. Place the equipment in theoriginal storage location inthe vehicle.

Removal and Installation ofthe Sealant CanisterTo remove the sealant canister:

1. Unlock the air only hose (F) fromthe sealant canister (B) bypulling up on the lever.

2. Pull the air only hose (F) fromthe sealant canister (B).

3. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)from the compressor (A).

4. Turn the sealant canister (B) sothe inflator filling hose is alignedwith the slot in the compressor.

5. Lift the sealant canister (B) fromthe compressor and replace witha new sealant canister. Seeyour dealer/retailer for moreinformation.

To install a new sealant canister:

1. Align the sealant/air hose (F) withthe slot in the air compressor.

2. Push the sealant canister (B)down and turn it clockwise.

3. Wrap the sealant/air hose (F)around the air compressorchannel to stow it in its originallocation.

4. Push the air compressor inflatorhose (F) onto the sealantcanister inlet and push thelever down.


Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit StorageTo access the tire sealant andcompressor kit:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate onpage 2-8.

2. Push in the levers and lift theload floor up.

3. Turn the retainercounterclockwise andremove the tire sealantand compressor kit.

To store the tire sealant andcompressor kit, reverse the steps.

Appearance Care

Interior CleaningThe vehicle’s interior will continue tolook its best if it is cleaned often.Although not always visible,dust and dirt can accumulate on theupholstery. Dirt can damagecarpet, fabric, leather, and plasticsurfaces. Regular vacuumingis recommended to remove particlesfrom the upholstery. It is importantto keep the upholstery frombecoming and remaining heavilysoiled. Soils should be removed asquickly as possible. The vehicle’sinterior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains toset rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may requiremore frequent cleaning. Use carebecause newspapers and garmentsthat transfer color to homefurnishings may also transfer colorto the vehicle’s interior.


When cleaning the vehicle’s interior,only use cleaners specificallydesigned for the surfaces beingcleaned. Permanent damage mayresult from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were notintended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidentalover-spray from other surfacesimmediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to thecleaning cloth.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage to therear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents thatmay become concentrated in thevehicle’s breathing space. Beforeusing cleaners, read and adhere toall safety instructions on thelabel. While cleaning the vehicle’sinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the vehicle’sdoors and windows.

Dust may be removed from smallbuttons and knobs using a smallbrush with soft bristles.

Products that remove odors fromthe vehicle’s upholstery andclean the vehicle’s glass can beobtained from your dealer/retailer.

Do not clean the vehicle using:

• A knife or any other sharp objectto remove a soil from any interiorsurface.

• A stiff brush. It can causedamage to the vehicle’s interiorsurfaces.

• Heavy pressure or aggressiverubbing with a cleaning cloth.Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and does notimprove the effectiveness ofsoil removal.

• Laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers can leave residuethat streaks and attracts dirt. Forliquid cleaners, about 20 dropsper gallon (3.78 L) of wateris a good guide. Use only mild,neutral-pH soaps.

• Too much cleaner that saturatesthe upholstery.

• Organic solvents such as naptha,alcohol, etc. that can damage thevehicle’s interior.


Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment frequently toremove dust and loose dirt.A canister vacuum with a beater barin the nozzle may only be usedon floor carpet and carpeted floormats. For any soil, always tryto remove it first with plain water orclub soda. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot theremaining soil with a paper towel.Allow the soil to absorb intothe paper towel until no more canbe removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excessmoisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiledarea until the cleaning clothremains clean.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used withplain water.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner orspot lifter is to be used, test a smallhidden area for colorfastness first. Ifthe locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation mayresult, clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has beencompleted, a paper towel can beused to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with watercan be used to remove dust. Ifa more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution canbe used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat todry. Never use steam to cleanleather. Never use spot lifters orspot removers on leather. Manycommercial leather cleanersand coatings that are sold topreserve and protect leather maypermanently change the appearanceand feel of the leather and are notrecommended. Do not usesilicone or wax-based products, orthose containing organic solvents toclean the vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearanceby increasing the gloss in anon-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on leather.


Instrument Panel, Vinyl,and Other PlasticSurfacesA soft cloth dampened with watermay be used to remove dust.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot liftersor removers on plastic surfaces.Many commercial cleanersand coatings that are sold topreserve and protect soft plasticsurfaces may permanently changethe appearance and feel of theinterior and are not recommended.Do not use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containingorganic solvents to clean thevehicle’s interior because they canalter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections inthe windshield and even makeit difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{ CAUTION

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips willmake them last longer, sealbetter, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a cleancloth. During very cold, dampweather frequent application may berequired. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.

Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve thevehicle’s finish is to keep it clean bywashing it often.

Notice: Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damagethe emblems or nameplates onthe vehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states thatit should not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and itwould not be covered bythe warranty.


Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight. Use a car washingsoap. Do not use cleaning agentsthat are petroleum based orthat contain acid or abrasives, asthey can damage the paint, metal orplastic on the vehicle. Approvedcleaning products can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer. Followall manufacturers’ directionsregarding correct product usage,necessary safety precautionsand appropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches andwater spotting.

High pressure car washes maycause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 12 inches (30 cm)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result indamage or removal of paint anddecals.

Cleaning ExteriorLamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth and a car washingsoap to clean exterior lamps andlenses. Follow instructionsunder Washing Your Vehicle onpage 5-69.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained fromyour dealer/retailer.

If the vehicle has abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish, theclearcoat gives more depth andgloss to the colored basecoat.Always use waxes and polishes thatare non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish onthe vehicle.


Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicalsfrom industrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle’s finish ifthey remain on painted surfaces.Wash the vehicle as soon aspossible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that aremarked safe for painted surfaces toremove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather andchemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. Tohelp keep the paint finish lookingnew, keep the vehicle garagedor covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Washing with water is all thatis usually needed. However,chrome polish may be used onchrome or stainless steel trim, ifnecessary.

Use special care with aluminumtrim. To avoid damaging protectivetrim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam or caustic soapto clean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Windshield and WiperBladesClean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lintfree cloth or paper towel soakedwith windshield washer fluidor a mild detergent. Wash thewindshield thoroughly when cleaningthe blades. Bugs, road grime,sap, and a buildup of vehiclewash/wax treatments may causewiper streaking. Replace thewiper blades if they are worn ordamaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without properremoval


Aluminum WheelsNotice: Chrome wheels andother chrome trim may bedamaged if the vehicle is notwashed after driving on roadsthat have been sprayed withmagnesium, calcium or sodiumchloride. These chlorides areused on roads for conditionssuch as ice and dust. Alwayswash the vehicle’s chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

Notice: Using strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleaners thatcontain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs would not becovered by the warranty. Use onlyapproved cleaners on aluminumor chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a softclean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a softclean towel. A wax may thenbe applied.

Notice: Using chrome polish onaluminum wheels could damagethe wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by the warranty.Use chrome polish on chromewheels only.

The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted surface of thevehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,abrasive cleaners, cleaners withacid, or abrasive cleaning brusheson them because the surfacecould be damaged. Do not usechrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the warranty. Neverdrive a vehicle equipped withaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brushwith tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.


Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintainingthe vehicle warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deepscratches in the finish shouldbe repaired right away. Bare metalwill corrode quickly and maydevelop into major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer/retailer.Larger areas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer’s/retailer’sbody and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice andsnow removal and dust control cancollect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rustcan develop on the underbodyparts such as fuel lines, frame, floorpan, and exhaust system eventhough they have corrosionprotection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbodywith plain water. Clean any areaswhere mud and debris can collect.Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened beforebeing flushed. Your dealer/retaileror an underbody car washingsystem can do this.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaceson the vehicle. This damage cantake two forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Although no defect in the paint jobcauses this, we will repair, at nocharge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by thisfallout condition within 12 months or12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.


Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for thevehicle. It appears on a plate inthe front corner of the instrumentpanel, on the driver side. It canbe seen through the windshield fromoutside the vehicle. The VIN alsoappears on the Vehicle Certificationand Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codehelps identify the vehicle’s engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 5-81 for the vehicle’sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label is on the inside of theglove box. It is very helpful if partsneed to be ordered. The labelhas the following information:

• Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and specialequipment

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.

Electrical System

Intermediate VoltageDevices and Wiring

{ CAUTION

Exposure to intermediate voltagecan cause shock and burns. Theintermediate voltage systems inthe vehicle can only be serviced bytechnicians with special training.

Intermediate voltage devices areidentified by labels. Do notremove, open, take apart, ormodify these devices. Intermediatevoltage cable or wiring has bluecovering. Do not probe, tamperwith, cut, or modify intermediatevoltage cable or wiring.


Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with yourdealer/retailer first. Someelectrical equipment can damagethe vehicle and the damagewould not be covered by thevehicle’s warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keepother components from workingas they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle’s battery, even if the vehicleis not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 1-54.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor isprotected by a circuit breaker and afuse. If the motor overheats dueto heavy snow or ice, the wiper willstop until the motor cools. If theoverload is caused by someelectrical problem, have it fixed.

Power Windows andOther Power OptionsCircuit breakers in the fuse blockprotect the power windows andother power accessories. When thecurrent load is too heavy, thecircuit breaker opens and closes,protecting the circuit until theproblem is fixed or goes away.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicleare protected from short circuits byfuses. This greatly reduces thechance of circuit overload and firecaused by electrical problems.

There are three fuse blocks - themain underhood fuse block,the auxiliary hybrid underhood fuseblock and the instrument panelfuse block.

To identify and check fuses andrelays, refer to the Fuse UsageChart on the inside surface of thefuse panel door.


Instrument Panel FuseBlockThe instrument panel fuse block islocated on the passenger sideof the lower console.

Pull the latch of the fuse box coverstraight back to access thefuses.

Fuses UsagePWR SEAT Power Seat

PASSP/WIN

Passenger SidePower Window

DRIVP/WIN

Driver Side PowerWindow

S/ROOF Sunroof ModuleCIGAR Cigarette Lighter

Fuses Usage

ECM/TCM

Engine ControlModule(ECM)/TransmissionControl Module(TCM)

FSCM Fuel Storage ControlModule


Fuses Usage

ISRVM Inside RearviewMirror

CLUSTER Instrument PanelCluster

AIR BAG Airbag System

OSRVM Outside RearviewMirror

KEY CAP Key CaptureSolenoid

WHL S/W Steering WheelSwitch

F/DR LCK Front Driver DoorLock

APO2 Accessory PowerOutlet 2

BCM (VB3)Body ControlModule (BCM)(VB3)

DR LCK Door Lock

BCM (VB6) Body ControlModule (VB6)


Fuses Usage


TRL TrailerAIRCON Air ConditionerAUDIO Audio


IGN SW Ignition SwitchAIR BAG Air Bag SystemWASHER Washer Pump

APO1 Accessory PowerOutlet 1

FSCM Fuel Storage ControlModule

RR CLR Rear Closure


DRL Daytime RunningLight


ONSTAR OnStar®

Relays Usage

RELAYACC/RAP

Accessory, RetainedAccessory Power(RAP) Relay

RELAYRUN/CRANK

Run/Crank Relay

Underhood Fuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is locatedon the driver side of the enginecompartment, near the battery.

Notice: Spilling liquid onany electrical components on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.


Fuses UsageFAN MAIN Cooling Fan MainREAR/WPR Rear Wiper Motor

FAN AUX Cooling FanAuxiliary

Fuses Usage

ECM/TCM/SGCM

Engine ControlModule/TransmissionControlModule/Serial DataGatewayCommunicationModule

Fuses Usage

ECM Engine ControlModule

ENG-3 Engine 3ENG-2 Engine 2ENG-1 Engine 1

HYBRIDBEC Hybrid BEC

RUN RunS/ROOF Sunroof Module

HTD/SEAT Heated Seat ControlModule

BCM Body ControlModule

STRTR Starter MotorWPR Windshield Wiper

4WD/ESCM All-Wheel DriveSystem

ABS Antilock BrakeSystem Module

A/C CLTCH Air ConditioningCompressor

BLWR MTR Blower Motor


Fuses UsageAMP Amplifier

HORN Horn

ABS Antilock BrakeSystem Module

I/P BECInstrument PanelBussed ElectricalCenter

FRT FOG Front Fog Lamps

I/P BECInstrument PanelBussed ElectricalCenter

DRL Daytime RunningLight

T/LAMP RT Right Turn andParking Lamps

T/LAMP LT Left Turn andParking Lamps

TRLRT/LAMP

Trailer ParkingLamps

HDLP HI LTPassenger SideHigh-BeamHeadlamp

STOP LP StoplampsDEFOG Defroster Fog

Fuses Usage

HDLPLO RT

Driver SideLow-BeamHeadlamp

HDLPLO LT

Passenger SideLow-BeamHeadlamp

HDLPHI RT

Driver SideHigh-BeamHeadlamp

OSRVMHTR

Outside RearviewMirror Heating

Relays UsageFAN MAIN

RLYCooling Fan MainRelay

FAN CTRLRLY

Cooling Fan ControlRelay

FAN AUXRLY

Cooling FanAuxiliary Relay

PWR/TRNRLY

Engine ControlModule/CAM,Canister, Injectors,Electronic ThrottleControl Relay

Relays UsageSTRTR

RLY Starter Relay

RUN RLY Run RelayA/C CLTCH

RLYAir ConditioningCompressor Relay

WPR SPDRLY

Windshield WiperSpeed Relay

HORN RLY Horn RelayWPR

CNTRLRLY

Windshield WiperControl Relay

T/LAMPRLY Parking Lamp Relay

HDLPHI RLY

High-BeamHeadlamp Relay

HDLPLO RLY

Low-BeamHeadlamp Relay

FRT FOGRLY

Front FoglampRelay

STOPLP RLY Stoplamp Relay

DEFOGRLY Defogger Relay


Fuses UsageHYBRIDPUMPS Hybrid Pumps

HILL HOLDVLVS Hill Hold Valves

AUXTRANSPUMP

AuxiliaryTransmissionPump

Relays UsageHILL HOLD

VLVS Hill Hold Valves

AUXTRANSPUMP

AuxiliaryTransmissionPump


Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your retailer for moreinformation.

Cooling System 9.5 qt 9.0 LEngine Oil with Filter 5.0 qt 4.7 LFuel Tank 18.0 gal 68.1 LTransmission (Bottom Pan Removal) 6.9 qt 6.5 LWheel Nut Torque 100 ft lb 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.4L L4 Engine Z Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)


✍ NOTES


MaintenanceSchedule

Maintenance ScheduleIntroduction .........................6-1MaintenanceRequirements ....................6-1

Your Vehicle and theEnvironment ......................6-2

Using the MaintenanceSchedule ...........................6-2

Scheduled Maintenance ......6-3Additional RequiredServices ............................6-5

Maintenance Footnotes .......6-7Owner Checks andServices ............................6-8

At Each Fuel Fill ................6-8At Least Once a Month ......6-9At Least Once a Year ........6-9Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants ................6-11

MaintenanceReplacement Parts ..........6-12

Engine Drive BeltRouting ...........................6-13

Maintenance Record .........6-14

MaintenanceSchedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at theproper level and change asrecommended.

MaintenanceRequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals,checks, inspections, replacementparts, and recommended fluidsand lubricants as prescribedin this manual are necessary tokeep this vehicle in good workingcondition. Any damage causedby failure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Maintenance Schedule 6-1

Your Vehicle and theEnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not onlyhelps to keep the vehicle in goodworking condition, but also helps theenvironment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Impropervehicle maintenance can evenaffect the quality of the air webreathe. Improper fluid levels or thewrong tire inflation can increasethe level of emissions from thevehicle. To help protect theenvironment, and to keep thevehicle in good condition, be sure tomaintain the vehicle properly.

Using the MaintenanceScheduleWe want to help keep this vehicle ingood working condition. But wedo not know exactly how youwill drive it. You might drive veryshort distances only a few times aweek. Or you might drive longdistances all the time in very hot,dusty weather. You might use

the vehicle in making deliveries. Oryou might drive it to work, to doerrands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the differentways people use their vehicles,maintenance needs vary. You mightneed more frequent checks andreplacements. So please read thefollowing and note how youdrive. If you have any questions onhow to keep the vehicle in goodcondition, see your dealer/retailer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargowithin recommended limits on theTire and Loading Informationlabel. See Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-18.

• are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. SeeGasoline Octane on page 5-5.

The services in ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-3 should beperformed when indicated. SeeAdditional Required Services

on page 6-5 and MaintenanceFootnotes on page 6-7 for furtherinformation.

{ CAUTION

Performing maintenance work ona vehicle can be dangerous. Intrying to do some jobs, you canbe seriously injured. Do your ownmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipmentfor the job. If you have any doubt,see your dealer/retailer to have aqualified technician do the work.See Doing Your Own ServiceWork on page 5-4.

Some maintenance services can becomplex. So, unless you aretechnically qualified and have thenecessary equipment, haveyour dealer/retailer do these jobs.

6-2 Maintenance Schedule

When you go to your dealer/retailerfor service, trained and supportedservice technicians will performthe work using genuine parts.

To purchase service information,see Service Publications OrderingInformation on page 7-13.

Owner Checks and Services onpage 6-8 tells what should bechecked, when to check it, and whatcan easily be done to help keepthe vehicle in good condition.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to useare listed in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-11and Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 6-12. When thevehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should bereplaced and all necessary repairsdone before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommendthe use of genuine parts fromyour dealer/retailer.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the Change Engine Oillight displays, service is required forthe vehicle. Have the vehicleserviced as soon as possible withinthe next 600 miles (1 000 km). Itis possible that, if driving under thebest conditions, the engine oillife system may not indicate thatvehicle service is necessary for overa year. However, the engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Yourdealer/retailer has trained servicetechnicians who will performthis work using genuine parts andreset the system.

If the engine oil life system is everreset accidentally, service thevehicle within 3,000 miles(5 000 km) since the last service.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 5-14 for information onthe Engine Oil Life System andresetting the system.

When the Change Engine Oil lightappears, certain services, checks,and inspections are required.Required services are described inthe following for “Maintenance I”and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it isrecommended that the first servicebe Maintenance I, the secondservice be Maintenance II, and thenalternate Maintenance I andMaintenance II thereafter. However,in some cases, Maintenance IImay be required more often.


Maintenance I — UseMaintenance I if the Change EngineOil light displays within 10 monthssince the vehicle was purchased orMaintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — UseMaintenance II if the previousservice performed wasMaintenance I. Always use

Maintenance II whenever the lightdisplays 10 months or more sincethe last service or if the light has notcome on at all for one year.

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-11. Reset oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-14. An Emission ControlService.

• •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-15. See footnote (l). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 5-50 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Monthon page 6-9.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”in this section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •


Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (k). •Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g). •

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles(kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage orleaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-15. • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid(severe service). See footnote (h). • • •


Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Change automatic transmission fluid(normal service). •

Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. •

Engine cooling system service(or every five years, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service. Seefootnote (m).

•

Vehicles with DOT-4 brake fluidonly: Change brake hydraulic fluid ata regular maintenance service everytwo years. See footnote (n).


Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake linesand hoses for proper hook-up,binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.Inspect disc brake pads for wearand rotors for surface condition.Inspect other brake parts, includingcalipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing partsor signs of wear.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and havethem replaced if they are cracked,swollen, or deteriorated. Inspectall pipes, fittings, and clamps;replace with genuine parts asneeded. To help ensure properoperation, a pressure test ofthe cooling system and pressurecap and cleaning the outside of theradiator and air conditioningcondenser is recommended at leastonce a year.

(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear,cracking, or contamination.Clean the windshield and wiperblades, if contaminated. Replacewiper blades that are worn ordamaged. See Windshield WiperBlade Replacement on page 5-38and Windshield and WiperBlades on page 5-71 for moreinformation.

(e) Make sure the safety beltreminder light and safety beltassemblies are working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system parts.If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doingits job, have it repaired. Have anytorn or frayed safety belts replaced.Also see Checking the RestraintSystems on page 1-56.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders,door hinges and latches, hoodhinges and latches, glove boxhinges, sunroof (if equipped), andany folding seat hardware. Morefrequent lubrication may be requiredwhen exposed to a corrosive

environment. Applying siliconegrease on weatherstrips with a cleancloth will make them last longer,seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(g) Check system for interferenceor binding and for damaged ormissing parts. Replace partsas needed. Replace anycomponents that have high effort orexcessive wear.

(h) Severe service is when thevehicle is mainly driven under oneor more of these conditions:− In heavy city traffic where the

outside temperature regularlyreaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer

towing.− Uses such as found in taxi,

police, or delivery service.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill coolingsystem. This service can becomplex; you should have yourdealer/retailer perform this service.


See Engine Coolant on page 5-20for what to use. Inspect hoses. Cleanradiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test thecooling system and pressure cap.

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle systemcould indicate a problem. Havethe system inspected and repairedand the fluid level checked. Addfluid if needed.

(k) Or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first. If driving regularlyunder dusty conditions, the filter mayrequire replacement more often.

(l) If driving regularly under dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying,excessive cracks, or obviousdamage. Replace belt if necessary.

(n) Vehicles using DOT-4 brakefluid only: Drain, flush, andrefill brake hydraulic system at aregular maintenance service (I or II)every two years. This service canbe complex; you should have

your dealer/retailer perform thisservice. See Brakes on page 5-25and Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-11.

Owner Checks andServicesThese owner checks and servicesshould be performed at the intervalsspecified to help ensure vehiclesafety, dependability, and emissioncontrol performance. Your dealer/retailer can assist with these checksand services.

Be sure any necessary repairs arecompleted at once. Wheneverany fluids or lubricants are added tothe vehicle, make sure they arethe proper ones, as shown inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-11.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform theseunderhood checks at each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level Check

Notice: It is important to checkthe engine oil regularly andkeep it at the proper level. Failureto keep the engine oil at theproper level can cause damage tothe engine not covered by thevehicle warranty.

Check the engine oil level and addthe proper oil if necessary. SeeEngine Oil on page 5-11.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant leveland add DEX-COOL® coolantmixture if necessary. See EngineCoolant on page 5-20.


Windshield Washer FluidLevel CheckCheck the windshield washer fluidlevel in the windshield washerfluid reservoir and add the properfluid if necessary.

At Least Once a MonthTire Inspection and InflationCheckInspect the vehicle’s tires for wearand make sure they are inflatedto the correct pressures. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-43.

At Least Once a YearStarter Switch Check

{ CAUTION

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle could movesuddenly. If the vehicle moves,you or others could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake on page 2-22.Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine ineach gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in P (Park) orN (Neutral). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contactyour dealer/retailer for service.

Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control System Check

{ CAUTION

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle could movesuddenly. If the vehicle moves,you or others could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 2-22.Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition to ON/RUN, but donot start the engine. Withoutapplying the regular brake, try tomove the shift lever out ofP (Park) with normal effort. If the


shift lever moves out of P (Park),contact your dealer/retailer forservice.

Ignition Transmission LockCheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF in each shiftlever position.

• The ignition should turn toLOCK/OFF only when theshift lever is in P (Park).

• The ignition key should come outonly in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer/retailer ifservice is required.

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ CAUTION

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

• To check the P (Park)mechanism’s holding ability: Withthe engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer/retailer ifservice is required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plainwater to flush any corrosivematerials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly anyareas where mud and other debriscan collect.

Tire Sealant andCompressor KitCheck the sealant expiration dateprinted on the instruction label of theTire Sealant and Compressor Kitat least once a year. See yourdealer/retailer for a replacementcanister.


Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays theAmerican Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburstsymbol. To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, seeEngine Oil on page 5-11.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page 5-20.

Hydraulic Brake System

Vehicles with DOT-3 brake fluid only: Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.Vehicles with DOT-4 brake fluid only: DOT-4 Brake Fluid (GM PartNo. U.S. 88862828, in Canada 88862829).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Parking Brake Cable Guides Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (Saturn Part No. 21038869 or GM Part No.U.S. 12346293, in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements ofNLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood, Liftgate Door, and RearFolding Seat Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).


Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Sunroof TrackLubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (Saturn Part No. 21038869 or GM PartNo. U.S. 12346293, in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirementsof NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your retailer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part NumberEngine Air Cleaner/Filter 96815102 —Engine Oil Filter 12605566 PF457GPassenger Compartment Air Filter Element 19130294 —Spark Plugs 12625058 41-103Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 24 in (60.0 cm) 25925618 —Passenger Side – 16 in (40.0 cm) 25925620 —Rear – 12.0 in (30.0 cm) 96624648 —


Engine Drive BeltRouting

The engine drive belt on this hybridvehicle is under a higher tensionthan the engine drive belt ona non-hybrid vehicle and requires aspecial tool to service. See yourdealer/retailer for service.


Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-1. Any additionalinformation from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You shouldretain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed


Maintenance Record (cont’d)




Maintenance Record (cont’d)




CustomerAssistanceInformation

Customer Assistanceand InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure .........................7-1

Online Owner Center ..........7-4Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)Users ................................7-4

Customer AssistanceOffices ..............................7-5

GM MobilityReimbursement Program ...7-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram ............................7-5

Scheduling ServiceAppointments ....................7-7

Courtesy Transportation ......7-8Collision Damage Repair ....7-9

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernment ....................7-12

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernment ....................7-12

Reporting Safety Defectsto Saturn .........................7-13

Service PublicationsOrdering Information ........7-13

Vehicle Data Recordingand PrivacyVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy .....................7-14

Event Data Recorders .......7-14OnStar® ............................7-15Navigation System ............7-15Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) .........7-15

Customer Assistanceand Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your retailer and toSaturn. Together we are committedto providing our customers withunparalleled service, before, during,and after the purchase of aSaturn vehicle, for total customersatisfaction. We call this the SaturnDifference. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle are resolvedby the retailer’s sales or servicedepartments. If, for any reason, yourownership experience falls belowyour expectations, we suggestyou take the following action:

STEP ONE: Contact the RetailCustomer Assistance Liaison. Anymember of the retail managementteam has the authority and thedesire to resolve your concerns.

Customer Assistance Information 7-1

Normally, concerns can be quicklyresolved at this level.

STEP TWO: Should you needadditional assistance, in the U.S.,contact the Saturn CustomerAssistance Center by calling1-800-553-6000. In Canada, call theSaturn Customer CommunicationCentre at 1-800-263-1999. A SaturnCustomer Assistance Center teammember will handle your call andassist in providing product andwarranty information, the nearestretailer location, roadside assistance,brochures, literature and discuss anyconcerns you may have.

We encourage you to call the toll-freenumber in order to give your inquiryprompt attention. Please have thefollowing information available togive the Customer AssistanceRepresentative:

• Vehicle Identification Number(VIN). This 17-digit number canbe found on the vehicleregistration or title, on the upper

driver side corner of theinstrument panel, or on yourroadside assistance key card.

• The name of your selling andservicing retail facility.

• Vehicle delivery date and presentmileage.

• Your daytime and evening phonenumbers.

When contacting Saturn, pleaseremember that your concernwill likely be resolved at a retailer’sfacility. That is why we suggestyou follow Step One first.

STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): BothSaturn and its retailers arecommitted to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with your Saturnvehicle. However, if you continueto remain unsatisfied after followingthe procedure outlined in StepsOne and Two, Saturn and itsretailers offer the additional

assistance of a neutral partythrough our voluntary participation ina mediation/arbitration programcalled Better Business Bureau(BBB) Auto Line.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Thisprogram is available at no cost toyou, our customer.

Although you may be required toresort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing acourt action, use of the programis free of charge and your case isgenerally heard within 40 days.If you do not agree with the decisiongiven in your case, you can rejectit and proceed with any other venuefor relief available to you.

7-2 Customer Assistance Information

Contact the BBB Auto Line Programby using the toll-free telephonenumber or by writing them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and otherfactors. Saturn Corporation reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):

General Motors Participation inthe Mediation/Arbitration Program

In the event that you do not feelyour concerns have been addressedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps 1 and 2, GeneralMotors of Canada Limited hascommitted to binding arbitration ofowner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involvedby an impartial third party arbiter,and may include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entiredispute settlement process, from thetime you file your complaint to thefinal decision, should be completedin approximately 70 days. Webelieve our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call theSaturn Customer CommunicationCentre, 1-800-263-1999, or you maywrite to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).


Online Owner CenterOnline Owner Center (U.S.) —www.gmownercenter.com/saturnInformation and services customizedfor your specific vehicle — all inone convenient place.

• Digital owner manual, warrantyinformation, and more

• Online service and maintenancerecords

• Find Saturn retailers for servicenationwide

• Exclusive privileges and offers

• Recall notices for your specificvehicle

• OnStar® and GM CardmemberServices Earnings summaries

Other Helpful Links:

Saturn − www.saturn.com

Saturn Merchandise —www.saturncollection.com

Help Center —www.saturn.com/helpcenter

• FAQ

• Contact Us

My GM Canada (Canada) —www.gm.caMy GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable toolsand services you will have access to:

• My Showroom: Find and saveinformation on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

• My Dealers/Retailers: Savedetails such as address andphone number for each of yourpreferred GM dealers/retailers.

• My Driveway: Access quick linksto parts and service estimates,check trade-in values, or schedule

a service appointment by addingthe vehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

• My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM Canadasection within www.gm.ca.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist owners who have hearingdifficulties, Saturn has installedspecial TDD (TelecommunicationDevices for the Deaf) equipment inits Saturn Customer AssistanceCenter.

Any hearing or speech-impairedcustomer who has access to a TDDor to a conventional Text Telephone(TTY) can communicate withSaturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000.TTY users in Canada may dial1-800-263-3830.


Customer AssistanceOfficesSaturn encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. If a customer wishes towrite to Saturn, the letter shouldbe addressed to:Saturn Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33173Detroit, MI 48232-5173

1-800-553-60001-800-833-6000 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-553-6000In Canada, write to:Saturn Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada Ltd.CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7GMcanada.com1-800-263-19991-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program, available to qualifiedapplicants, can reimburse you up to$1,000 toward eligible aftermarketdriver or passenger adaptiveequipment you may require for yourvehicle such as hand controls,wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.

The offer is available for a limitedperiod of time from the date ofvehicle purchase/lease.

For more details, or to determineyour vehicle’s eligibility, visityour Saturn retailer or call theSaturn Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-553-6000. Text telephone(TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.

In Canada, customers may call theSaturn Customer CommunicationCentre at 1-800-263-1999. TTYusers in Canada may call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S. purchased vehicles, call1-800-553-6000; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-800-889-2438).

For Canadian purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for AssistanceWhen calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:

• Your name, home address, andhome telephone number

• Telephone number of yourlocation

• Location of the vehicle


• Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

• Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem

CoverageServices are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner isnot covered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Saturn and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Saturn and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to an

owner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, orthe same type of claim is mademany times.

Services Provided• Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel forthe vehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

• Lock-Out Service: Service isprovided to unlock the vehicleif you are locked out. A remoteunlock may be available ifyou have OnStar®. For securityreasons, the driver mustpresent identification before thisservice is given.

• Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Saturn retailer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is alsogiven when the vehicle is stuckin sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Service isprovided to change a flat tirewith the spare tire. The spare tire,if equipped, must be in goodcondition and properly inflated. Itis the owner’s responsibilityfor the repair or replacement ofthe tire if it is not covered bythe warranty.

• Battery Jump Start: Service isprovided to jump start a deadbattery.

• Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expenses maybe reimbursed during the 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km)Powertrain warranty period. Itemsconsidered are hotel, meals, andrental car.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance• Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.

• Legal fines.


• Mounting, dismounting orchanging of snow tires, chains,or other traction devices.

• Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific to CanadianPurchased Vehicles• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is

approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery maybe restricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

• Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

• Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route orthe most scenic route. There is alimit of six requests per year.Additional travel informationis also available. Allow threeweeks for delivery.

• Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometres from whereyour trip was started toqualify. General Motors ofCanada Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copyof the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistanceadvisor will help you makearrangements and explain howto receive payment.

• Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may giveyou permission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairsnot covered by the warranty arethe owner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer/retailerand request an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising your service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer/retailer can help minimizeyour inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, pleasecall your dealership/retailer, let themknow this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer/retailer requestsyou to bring the vehicle for service,you are urged to do so as earlyin the work day as possible to allowfor the same day repair.


Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingretailers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customersupport program for vehicles withthe Bumper to Bumper (BaseWarranty Coverage period inCanada), extended powertrain, andhybrid specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several courtesy transportationoptions are available to assistin reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, Saturnhelps to minimize yourinconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Dependingon the circumstances, yourretailer can offer you one of thefollowing:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Retailers mayprovide you with shuttle service toget you to your destination withminimal interruption of your dailyschedule. This includes one-way orround trip shuttle service withinreasonable time and distanceparameters of the retailer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead of the

retailer’s shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowedby Saturn for shuttle service.In addition, for U.S. customers,should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative,limited reimbursement forreasonable fuel expenses may beavailable. Claim amounts shouldreflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts. Seeyour retailer for informationregarding the allowance amounts forreimbursement of fuel or othertransportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your retailer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreement


and meet state/ provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card,etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike-vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformationAll program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery retailer. Please contact yourretailer for specific information aboutavailability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriateretailer personnel.

Saturn reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change ordiscontinue Courtesy Transportation

at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuantto the terms and conditionsdescribed herein at its solediscretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, havethe damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish your vehicle’sresale value, and safetyperformance can be compromisedin subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which your vehiclewas originally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are your best choiceto ensure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability,and safety are preserved. The use

of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New VehicleWarranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair.These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were totallosses in prior crashes. In mostcases, the parts being recycled arefrom undamaged sections of thevehicle. A recycled originalequipment GM part, may be anacceptable choice to maintain yourvehicle’s originally designedappearance and safety performance,however, the history of theseparts is not known. Such parts arenot covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not coveredby that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for yourvehicle. As a result, these parts mayfit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and


may not perform properly insubsequent collisions. Aftermarketparts are not covered by yourGM New Vehicle Limited Warranty,and any vehicle failure related tosuch parts are not covered bythat warranty.

Repair FacilityWe recommend that you choose acollision repair facility that meetsyour needs before you everneed collision repairs. Yourdealer/retailer may have a collisionrepair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the artequipment, or be able torecommend a collision repair centerthat has GM-trained techniciansand comparable equipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage affordedby various insurance policy terms.

Many insurance policies providereduced protection to your GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will not specifyaftermarket collision parts. Whenpurchasing insurance, werecommend that you assure yourvehicle will be repaired withGM original equipment collisionparts. If such insurance coverage isnot available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you tohave insurance that assures repairswith Genuine GM OriginalEquipment Manufacturer (OEM)parts or Genuine Manufacturerreplacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be chargedat the end of your lease forpoor quality repairs.

If a Crash OccursHere is what to do if you areinvolved in a crash.

• Check to make sure that you areall right. If you are uninjured,make sure that no one else inyour vehicle, or the other vehicle,is injured.

• If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help.Do not leave the scene of a crashuntil all matters have beentaken care of. Move your vehicleonly if its position puts you indanger or you are instructed tomove it by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary andrequested information topolice and other parties involvedin the crash. Do not discussyour personal condition, mentalframe of mind, or anythingunrelated to the crash. This willhelp guard against post-crashlegal action.


• If you need roadside assistance,call GM Roadside Assistance.See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 7-5 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven,know where the towing servicewill be taking it. Get a cardfrom the tow truck operator orwrite down the driver’s name, theservice’s name, and the phonenumber.

• Remove any valuables from yourvehicle before it is towed away.Make sure this includes yourinsurance information andregistration if you keep theseitems in your vehicle.

• Gather the important informationyou will need from the otherdriver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’slicense number, vehicle licenseplate, vehicle make, modeland model year, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN),insurance company and policy

number, and a generaldescription of the damage to theother vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurancecompany from the scene ofthe crash. They will walkyou through the information theywill need. If they ask for apolice report, phone or go to thepolice department headquartersthe next day and you can geta copy of the report for a nominalfee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, areport may not be necessary.This is especially true if there areno injuries and both vehiclesare driveable.

• Choose a reputable collisionrepair facility for your vehicle.Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a private collisionrepair facility to fix the damage,make sure you are comfortablewith them. Remember, youwill have to feel comfortable withtheir work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, readit carefully and make sure youunderstand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. Ifyou have a question, ask foran explanation. Reputable shopswelcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehiclerequires damage repairs, GMrecommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have apre-determined repair facilityof choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to thefacility that any requiredreplacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, either newGenuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be coveredby your GM vehicle warranty.


Insurance pays the bill for therepair, but you must live with therepair. Depending on yourpolicy limits, your insurancecompany may initially value therepair using aftermarket parts.Discuss this with your repairprofessional, and insist on GenuineGM parts. Remember if yourvehicle is leased you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accepta repair valuation based onthat insurance company’s collisionpolicy repair limits, as you haveno contractual limits with thatcompany. In such cases, you canhave control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stayswithin reasonable limits.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which couldcause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA), inaddition to notifying SaturnCorporation.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it could open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it could ordera recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you,your retailer or SaturnCorporation.

To contact NHTSA, call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go toSafercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington D.C., 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from Safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that your vehicle hasa safety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, in addition tonotifying General Motors ofCanada Limited. Call them at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9


Reporting Safety Defectsto SaturnIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, please notify Saturn.

Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:

Saturn Corporation100 Saturn ParkwayMail Drop 371-999-S24Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999,or write:

Saturn Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service PublicationsOrdering InformationService ManualsA variety of publications areavailable to you. Saturn servicemanuals are written for trainedtechnicians, and in some cases,specialized tools and equipment arenecessary to complete certainrepairs. However, the manuals areavailable to owners who eitherhave the training, or wish to gain agreater understanding of thetechnical aspect of their Saturn.

For additional publicationsinformation or to order publicationsin the United States, call tollfree 1-800-2-SATURN or visitSaturn-publications.com to orderon-line.

In Canada, Saturn service manualsare available by calling toll free1-800-551-4123.

Owner PublicationsInformation on how to obtainproduct bulletins and as describedbelow is applicable only in thefifty U.S. states and the District ofColumbia, and only for cars and lighttrucks with a Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) less than10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copies ofindividual bulletins are also atyour participating Saturn retailer.You can ask to see them.

In Canada, information relating toproduct service bulletins canbe obtained by contacting yourSaturn retailer.

Service BulletinsSaturn regularly sends its retailersuseful service bulletins about Saturnproducts. Saturn monitors productperformance in the field. Wethen prepare bulletins for servicingour products better. You canget these bulletins, too.


Bulletins cover various subjects.Some pertain to the proper use andcare of your vehicle. Somedescribe costly repairs. Othersdescribe inexpensive repairs which,if done on time with the latestparts, may avoid future costlyrepairs.

Some bulletins tell a technician howto repair a new or unexpectedcondition. Others describe a quickerway to fix your vehicle. They canhelp a technician service yourvehicle better.

Most bulletins apply to conditionsaffecting a small number of vehicles.Your Saturn retailer or a qualifiedtechnician may have to determine ifa specific bulletin applies to yourvehicle. To order Saturn bulletins,call Saturn Publications at1-800-2-SATURN or visitsaturn-publications.com toorder online.

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyYour Saturn vehicle has a numberof sophisticated computers thatrecord information about thevehicle’s performance and how it isdriven. For example, your vehicleuses computer modules to monitorand control engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules maystore data to help yourdealer/retailer technician serviceyour vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rateof fuel consumption or averagespeed. These modules mayalso retain the owner’s personalpreferences, such as radio pre-sets,seat positions, and temperaturesettings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an EventData Recorder (EDR). The mainpurpose of an EDR is to record, incertain crash or near crash-likesituations, such as an airbagdeployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:

• How various systems in yourvehicle were operating

• Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened

• How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal

• How fast the vehicle wastraveling


This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuriesoccur.Important: EDR data is recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no datais recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location) isrecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required,and access to the vehicle or theEDR is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer, otherparties, such as law enforcement,that have the special equipment, canread the information if they haveaccess to the vehicle or the EDR.

Saturn will not access this data orshare it with others except: withthe consent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request of police orsimilar government office; as part ofSaturn’s defense of litigationthrough the discovery process; or,as required by law. Data that Saturncollects or receives may also beused for Saturn research needs ormay be made available to othersfor research purposes, wherea need is shown and the data is nottied to a specific vehicle or vehicleowner.

OnStar®

If your vehicle has OnStar and yousubscribe to the OnStar services,please refer to the OnStarTerms and Conditions forinformation on data collection anduse. See also OnStar® Systemon page 2-29 in this manualfor more information.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the systemmay result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.Refer to the navigation systemoperating manual for information onstored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such astire pressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas key fobs for remote doorlocking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inSaturn vehicles does not useor record personal information orlink with any other Saturn systemcontaining personal information.


✍ NOTES


AAbout Driving Your Vehicle ......... iiAccessories and

Modifications ...................... 5-3Accessory Power Outlets ...... 3-16Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-55Additives, Fuel ...................... 5-5Add-On Electrical

Equipment ....................... 5-75Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ....... 5-15Air Conditioning ................... 3-17Airbag

Passenger StatusIndicator ....................... 3-26

Readiness Light ................ 3-25Airbag System ..................... 1-41

Adding Equipment toYour Airbag-EquippedVehicle ........................ 1-55

How Does an AirbagRestrain? ..................... 1-47

Passenger SensingSystem ........................ 1-49

Airbag System (cont.)Servicing Your

Airbag-EquippedVehicle ........................ 1-54

What Makes an AirbagInflate? ........................ 1-47

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates? ............. 1-48

When Should an AirbagInflate? ........................ 1-45

Where Are the Airbags? ..... 1-44Antenna, Fixed Mast ............ 3-84Antenna, XM™ Satellite

Radio Antenna System ...... 3-84Antilock Brake

System (ABS) .................... 4-6Antilock Brake, System

Warning Light ................... 3-28Appearance Care

Aluminum Wheels ............. 5-72Care of Safety Belts .......... 5-69Chemical Paint Spotting ..... 5-73Cleaning Exterior Lamps/

Lenses ........................ 5-70Fabric/Carpet ................... 5-68

Appearance Care (cont.)Finish Care ...................... 5-70Finish Damage ................. 5-73Instrument Panel, Vinyl,

and Other PlasticSurfaces ...................... 5-69

Interior Cleaning ............... 5-66Leather ........................... 5-68Sheet Metal Damage ........ 5-73Tires ............................... 5-72Underbody Maintenance .... 5-73Washing Your Vehicle ........ 5-69Weatherstrips ................... 5-69Windshield and Wiper

Blades ......................... 5-71Appointments, Scheduling

Service ............................. 7-7Audio System ...................... 3-56

Audio Steering WheelControls ....................... 3-82

Chime Level Adjustment .... 3-84Fixed Mast Antenna .......... 3-84Radio Reception ............... 3-83Setting the Clock .............. 3-56Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 3-82XM™ Satellite Radio

Antenna System ............ 3-84

INDEX i-1

Audio System(s) .................. 3-58Auto Stop Mode .................. 3-35Automatic Climate Control

System ........................... 3-17Automatic Door Lock .............. 2-7Automatic Door Unlock ........... 2-7Automatic Headlamp

System ........................... 3-13Automatic Transmission

Fluid ............................... 5-17Operation ........................ 2-20

BBattery ............................... 5-27

Electric PowerManagement ................. 3-14

Run-Down Protection ......... 3-15Bluetooth® .......................... 3-72Brake

Emergencies ...................... 4-6Brake Fluid ......................... 5-25Brakes ............................... 5-25

Regenerative Braking ........ 2-23System Warning Light ....... 3-27

Braking ................................ 4-5

Braking in Emergencies .......... 4-6Break-In, New Vehicle .......... 2-14Bulb Replacement ................ 5-35

Front Turn Signal andParking Lamps .............. 5-36

Halogen Bulbs .................. 5-35Headlamp Aiming .............. 5-33Headlamps ...................... 5-35License Plate Lamps ......... 5-37Replacement Bulbs ........... 5-37Taillamps, Turn Signal,

Stoplamps and Back-upLamps ......................... 5-36

Buying New Tires ................. 5-51

CCalibration .......................... 3-40California Fuel ....................... 5-5California Perchlorate

Materials Requirements ....... 5-4California Proposition 65

Warning ............................ 5-3Canadian Owners ..................... iiCapacities and

Specifications ................... 5-81

Carbon Monoxide ......... 2-26, 4-15Care of

Safety Belts ..................... 5-69Cargo Cover ....................... 2-38Cargo Management

System ........................... 2-39Cargo Tie Downs ................. 2-39CD, MP3 ............................ 3-66Center Console

Storage Area .................... 2-37Chains, Tire ........................ 5-57Charge/Assist Gage .............. 3-35Charging System Light .......... 3-27Check

Engine Lamp ................... 3-30Checking Things Under

the Hood ........................... 5-9Chemical Paint Spotting ........ 5-73Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ..... 1-27Infants and Young

Children ....................... 1-25Lower Anchors and Tethers

for Children .................. 1-31Older Children .................. 1-22Securing a Child Restraint

in a Rear SeatPosition ....................... 1-36

i-2 INDEX

Child Restraints (cont.)Securing a Child Restraint

in the Right Front SeatPosition ....................... 1-38

Where to Put theRestraint ...................... 1-29

Chime Level Adjustment ........ 3-84Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels ............. 5-72Exterior Lamps/Lenses ...... 5-70Fabric/Carpet ................... 5-68Finish Care ...................... 5-70Instrument Panel, Vinyl,

and Other PlasticSurfaces ...................... 5-69

Interior ............................ 5-66Leather ........................... 5-68Tires ............................... 5-72Underbody Maintenance .... 5-73Washing Your Vehicle ........ 5-69Weatherstrips ................... 5-69Windshield and Wiper

Blades ......................... 5-71Climate Control System

Automatic ........................ 3-17Outlet Adjustment ............. 3-22

Clock, Setting ...................... 3-56

Collision Damage Repair ......... 7-9Compass ............................ 3-40Compressor Kit

Storing ............................ 5-66Compressor Kit, Tire

Sealant ........................... 5-59Content Theft-Deterrent ......... 2-10Control of a Vehicle ............... 4-4Convenience Net ................. 2-38Coolant

Engine ............................ 5-20Engine Temperature

Warning Light ............... 3-29Surge Tank

Pressure Cap ............... 5-22Cooling System ................... 5-17Cruise Control ....................... 3-9Cruise Control Light .............. 3-33Cupholders ......................... 2-37Customer Assistance

InformationCourtesy Transportation ....... 7-8Customer Assistance for

Text Telephone (TTY)Users ............................ 7-4

Customer AssistanceOffices ........................... 7-5

Customer SatisfactionProcedure ...................... 7-1

Customer Assistance Information(cont.)

GM MobilityReimbursementProgram ........................ 7-5

Reporting Safety Defects toSaturn ......................... 7-13

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment .................. 7-12

Reporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment .................. 7-12

Roadside AssistanceProgram ........................ 7-5

Service PublicationsOrdering Information ...... 7-13

DDaytime Running Lamp ......... 3-13Defensive Driving ................... 4-3Delayed Locking .................... 2-6DIC Compass ...................... 3-40Disc, MP3 ........................... 3-66Doing Your Own

Service Work ..................... 5-4Dome Lamp ........................ 3-14

INDEX i-3

DoorAutomatic Door Lock .......... 2-7Automatic Door Unlock ........ 2-7Delayed Locking ................. 2-6Locks ............................... 2-6Power Door Locks .............. 2-6Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-7

DriverSeat Height Adjuster ........... 1-4

Driver Behavior ..................... 4-2Driver Information

Center (DIC) .................... 3-36DIC Operation and

Displays ....................... 3-36DIC Vehicle

Customization ............... 3-49DIC Warnings and

Messages .................... 3-42Driver Storage

Compartment ................... 2-38Driving

At Night .......................... 4-12Before a Long Trip ............ 4-14Defensive .......................... 4-3Drunken ............................ 4-4

Driving (cont.)Environment ...................... 4-2Highway Hypnosis ............ 4-14Hill and Mountain Roads .... 4-14In Rain and on Wet

Roads ......................... 4-13Rocking Your Vehicle to

Get it Out .................... 4-17Winter ............................. 4-15

Driving for Better FuelEconomy ........................... 4-3

EEDR .................................. 7-14Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ............ 5-75Fuses and Circuit

Breakers ...................... 5-75Instrument Panel Fuse

Block ........................... 5-76Power Windows and Other

Power Options .............. 5-75Underhood Fuse Block ...... 5-77Windshield Wiper Fuses .... 5-75

Electronic ImmobilizerPASS-Key® III+ ................ 2-12

Electronic ImmobilizerOperationPASS-Key® III+ ................ 2-12

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ............... 5-15Change Engine Oil Light .... 3-33Check and Service Engine

Soon Lamp .................. 3-30Coolant ........................... 5-20Coolant Heater ................. 2-19Coolant Temperature

Warning Light ............... 3-29Drive Belt Routing ............. 6-13Engine Compartment

Overview ...................... 5-10Exhaust ........................... 2-26Oil .................................. 5-11Oil Life System ................. 5-14Overheating ..................... 5-23Starting ........................... 2-15

Entry Lighting ...................... 3-14Event Data Recorders .......... 7-14Extender, Safety Belt ............ 1-22Exterior Lamps .................... 3-12

i-4 INDEX

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ............ 5-15Finish Damage .................... 5-73Fixed Mast Antenna ............. 3-84Flashers, Hazard Warning ....... 3-5Flash-to-Pass ........................ 3-7Flat Tire .............................. 5-58Fluid

Automatic Transmission ..... 5-17Windshield Washer ........... 5-24

Folding Rear Seat ................. 1-9Folding Seatback,

Passenger ......................... 1-7Fuel ..................................... 5-5

Additives ........................... 5-5California Fuel ................... 5-5Driving for Better

Economy ....................... 4-3Filling a Portable Fuel

Container ....................... 5-8Filling the Tank .................. 5-7Fuels in Foreign Countries ... 5-6Gage .............................. 3-34Gasoline Octane ................ 5-5Gasoline Specifications ........ 5-5Low Warning Light ............ 3-34

Fuel Economy Light ............. 3-35Fuses

Fuses and CircuitBreakers ...................... 5-75

Instrument Panel FuseBlock ........................... 5-76

Underhood Fuse Block ...... 5-77Windshield Wiper .............. 5-75

GGage

Fuel ................................ 3-34Speedometer ................... 3-24Tachometer ...................... 3-24

Gage, Charge/Assist ............. 3-35Garage Door Opener ............ 2-32Gasoline

Octane ............................. 5-5Specifications ..................... 5-5

Glove Box ........................... 2-37GM Mobility Reimbursement

Program ............................ 7-5

HHazard Warning Flashers ........ 3-5Head Restraints ..................... 1-2

HeadlampAiming ............................ 5-33

Headlamps .......................... 5-35Bulb Replacement ............. 5-35Daytime Running Lamp ..... 3-13Exterior Lamps ................. 3-12Flash-to-Pass ..................... 3-7Front Turn Signal and

Parking Lamps .............. 5-36Halogen Bulbs .................. 5-35High/Low Beam Changer ..... 3-7Wiper Activated ................ 3-12

Heated Seats ........................ 1-5Heater ................................ 3-17

Engine Coolant ................. 2-19Height Adjuster, Driver Seat .... 1-4Highbeam On Light .............. 3-34Highway Hypnosis ................ 4-14Hill and Mountain Roads ....... 4-14Hood

Checking Things Under ....... 5-9Release ............................ 5-9

Horn .................................... 3-5How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly .......................... 1-13

INDEX i-5

IIgnition Positions .................. 2-14Infants and Young Children,

Restraints ........................ 1-25Inflation - Tire Pressure ......... 5-43Inflator Kit, Tire .................... 5-59Instrument Panel

Brightness ....................... 3-14Cluster ............................ 3-23Overview ........................... 3-4

Intermediate Voltage Devicesand Wiring ....................... 5-74

JJump Starting ...................... 5-28

KKeyless Entry System ............ 2-3Keys .................................... 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall .......... 5-39Lamp

Malfunction Indicator ......... 3-30

LampsDome ............................. 3-14Reading .......................... 3-14

Lap-Shoulder Belt ................ 1-17LATCH System for Child

Restraints ........................ 1-31License Plate Lamps ............ 5-37Liftgate

Carbon Monoxide ............... 2-8Light

Airbag Readiness ............. 3-25Antilock Brake System

(ABS) Warning .............. 3-28Brake System Warning ...... 3-27Change Engine Oil ........... 3-33Charging System .............. 3-27Cruise Control .................. 3-33Engine Coolant

Temperature Warning ..... 3-29Fuel Economy .................. 3-35Highbeam On ................... 3-34Low Fuel Warning ............. 3-34Low Washer Fluid

Warning ....................... 3-34Oil Pressure ..................... 3-33Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator ....................... 3-26

Light (cont.)Safety Belt Reminders ....... 3-24Security ........................... 3-33StabiliTrak® /Traction

Control System (TCS)Warning Light ............... 3-28

Tire Pressure ................... 3-29Light, Auto Stop Mode .......... 3-35Lighting

Entry .............................. 3-14Lights

Exterior Lamps ................. 3-12Flash-to-Pass ..................... 3-7High/Low Beam Changer ..... 3-7

Loading Your Vehicle ............ 4-18Lockout Protection ................. 2-7Locks

Automatic Door Lock .......... 2-7Automatic Door Unlock ........ 2-7Delayed Locking ................. 2-6Door ................................. 2-6Lockout Protection .............. 2-7Power Door ....................... 2-6Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-7

Loss of Control .................... 4-11Low Fuel Warning Light ........ 3-34Low Washer Fluid Warning

Light ............................... 3-34

i-6 INDEX

Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children ...................... 1-31

LumbarManual Controls ................. 1-5

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional RequiredServices ........................ 6-5

At Each Fuel Fill ................ 6-8At Least Once a Month ....... 6-9At Least Once a Year ......... 6-9Introduction ....................... 6-1Maintenance Footnotes ....... 6-7Maintenance Record ......... 6-14Maintenance Replacement

Parts ........................... 6-12Maintenance

Requirements ................. 6-1Owner Checks and

Services ........................ 6-8Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants .................... 6-11Scheduled Maintenance ....... 6-3Using ............................... 6-2Your Vehicle and the

Environment ................... 6-2

Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 3-30Manual Lumbar Controls ......... 1-5Manual Seats ........................ 1-3Message

DIC Warnings andMessages .................... 3-42

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming

Rearview ...................... 2-27Manual Rearview Mirror ..... 2-27Outside Convex Mirror ....... 2-28Outside Heated Mirrors ...... 2-28Outside Power Mirrors ....... 2-28

MP3 ................................... 3-66MyGMLink.com ...................... 7-4

NNavigation System, Privacy ... 7-15New Vehicle Break-In ........... 2-14

OOdometer ........................... 3-24Odometer, Trip ..................... 3-24Off-Road Recovery ............... 4-10

OilChange Engine Oil Light .... 3-33Engine ............................ 5-11Pressure Light .................. 3-33

Oil, Engine Oil Life System .... 5-14Older Children, Restraints ...... 1-22Online Owner Center .............. 7-4OnStar, Privacy .................... 7-15OnStar® System, see

OnStar® Manual ............... 2-29Operation, Universal Home

Remote System ................ 2-33Outlet Adjustment ................. 3-22Outlets

Accessory Power .............. 3-16Outside

Convex Mirror .................. 2-28Heated Mirrors ................. 2-28Power Mirrors .................. 2-28

Owner Checks and Services ... 6-8Owners, Canadian .................... ii

INDEX i-7

PPaint, Damage ..................... 5-73Park

Shifting Into ..................... 2-23Shifting Out of .................. 2-25

Park Brake .......................... 2-22Parking

Over Things That Burn ...... 2-25Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator .......................... 3-26Passenger Sensing System ... 1-49Passing .............................. 4-11PASS-Key® III+ Electronic

Immobilizer ...................... 2-12PASS-Key® III+ Electronic

Immobilizer Operation ........ 2-12Perchlorate Materials

Requirements, California ...... 5-4Phone

Bluetooth® ....................... 3-72Power

Door Locks ........................ 2-6Electrical System .............. 5-75Retained Accessory ........... 2-15Seat ................................. 1-4Windows ........................... 2-9

Privacy ............................... 7-14Event Data Recorders ....... 7-14Navigation System ............ 7-15OnStar ............................ 7-15Radio Frequency

Identification ................. 7-15

RRadio Frequency Identification

(RFID), Privacy ................. 7-15Radio(s) ............................. 3-58Radios

Reception ........................ 3-83Setting the Clock .............. 3-56Theft-Deterrent ................. 3-82

Rainsense™ II Wipers ............ 3-8Reading Lamps ................... 3-14Rear Door Security Locks ....... 2-7Rear Seat Armrest ............... 2-38Rear Windshield Washer/

Wiper ............................... 3-9Rearview Mirror, Automatic

Dimming .......................... 2-27Rearview Mirrors .................. 2-27Reclining Seatbacks ............... 1-5

Recommended Fluids andLubricants ........................ 6-11

Recreational Vehicle Towing ... 4-23Regenerative Braking ............ 2-23Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System ............................. 2-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System, Operation .............. 2-4Replacement Bulbs .............. 5-37Replacement Parts,

Maintenance .................... 6-12Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ....... 7-12Saturn ............................. 7-13United States

Government .................. 7-12Restraint System Check

Checking the RestraintSystems ....................... 1-56

Replacing Restraint SystemParts After a Crash ........ 1-57

Retained Accessory Power .... 2-15Roadside

Assistance Program ............ 7-5Rocking Your Vehicle to Get

it Out .............................. 4-17

i-8 INDEX

Routing, Engine Drive Belt .... 6-13Running the Vehicle While

Parked ............................ 2-26

SSafety Belt Reminders .......... 3-24Safety Belts

Care of ........................... 5-69How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly ....................... 1-13Lap-Shoulder Belt ............. 1-17Safety Belt Extender ......... 1-22Safety Belt Use During

Pregnancy .................... 1-22Safety Belts Are for

Everyone ..................... 1-10Safety Warnings and Symbols .... iiiScheduled Maintenance .......... 6-3Seatback, Folding

Passenger ......................... 1-7Seats

Driver Seat HeightAdjuster ......................... 1-4

Heated Seats ..................... 1-5Manual Lumbar .................. 1-5

Seats (cont.)Passenger Folding

Seatback ....................... 1-7Power Seat ....................... 1-4Reclining Seatbacks ............ 1-5Split Folding Rear Seat ....... 1-9

Securing a Child RestraintRear Seat Position ............ 1-36Right Front Seat Position ... 1-38

Security Light ...................... 3-33Service ................................ 5-3

Accessories andModifications .................. 5-3

Adding Equipment to theOutside of the Vehicle ..... 5-4

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements .... 5-4

California Proposition 65Warning ......................... 5-3

Doing Your Own Work ........ 5-4Engine Soon Lamp ........... 3-30Publications Ordering

Information ................... 7-13Service, Scheduling

Appointments ..................... 7-7

Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-54

Setting the Clock ................. 3-56Sheet Metal Damage ............ 5-73Shifting Into Park ................. 2-23Shifting Out of Park .............. 2-25Signals, Turn and

Lane-Change ..................... 3-6Specifications, Capacities ...... 5-81Speedometer ....................... 3-24Split Folding Rear Seat .......... 1-9StabiliTrak® System ............... 4-7StabiliTrak®/TCS Warning

Light ............................... 3-28Starting the Engine .............. 2-15Steering ............................... 4-9Steering Wheel Controls,

Audio .............................. 3-82Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ...... 3-6Storage Areas

Cargo ManagementSystem ........................ 2-39

Center Console StorageArea ............................ 2-37

Convenience Net .............. 2-38

INDEX i-9

Storage Areas (cont.)Cupholders ...................... 2-37Driver Storage

Compartment ................ 2-38Glove Box ....................... 2-37Rear Seat Armrest ............ 2-38Sunglasses Storage

Compartment ................ 2-37Storing the Tire Sealant and

Compressor Kit ................ 5-66Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,

or Snow .......................... 4-17Sun Visors .......................... 2-10

TTachometer ......................... 3-24Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps andBack-up Lamps ............. 5-36

Theft-Deterrent, Radio ........... 3-82Theft-Deterrent Systems ........ 2-10

Content Theft-Deterrent ..... 2-10PASS-Key® III+ Electronic

Immobilizer ................... 2-12PASS-Key® III+ Electronic

Immobilizer Operation .... 2-12

Tilt Wheel ............................. 3-6Time, Setting ....................... 3-56Tire

Pressure Light .................. 3-29Tire Sealant

Storing ............................ 5-66Tires .................................. 5-38

Aluminum Wheels,Cleaning ...................... 5-72

Buying New Tires ............. 5-51Chains ............................ 5-57Cleaning .......................... 5-72Different Size ................... 5-53If a Tire Goes Flat ............ 5-58Inflation - Tire Pressure ..... 5-43Inspection and Rotation ..... 5-50Pressure Monitor

Operation ..................... 5-46Pressure Monitor System ... 5-45Tire Sealant and

Compressor Kit ............. 5-59Tire Sidewall Labeling ....... 5-39Tire Terminology and

Definitions .................... 5-41Uniform Tire Quality

Grading ....................... 5-54

Tires (cont.)Wheel Alignment and Tire

Balance ....................... 5-55Wheel Replacement .......... 5-55When It Is Time for New

Tires ............................ 5-51Towing

Recreational Vehicle .......... 4-23Towing a Trailer ................ 4-26Your Vehicle ..................... 4-22

TractionControl System (TCS) ......... 4-8StabiliTrak® System ............ 4-7

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ................ 5-17

Transmission Operation,Automatic ........................ 2-20

Trip Odometer ..................... 3-24Turn and Lane-Change

Signals ............................. 3-6Turn Signal/Multifunction

Lever ................................ 3-6

i-10 INDEX

UUniform Tire Quality Grading .. 5-54Universal Home Remote

System ........................... 2-32Operation ........................ 2-33

VVehicle

Control ............................. 4-4Design .............................. 4-2Loading ........................... 4-18Running While Parked ....... 2-26Symbols .............................. iii

Vehicle Customization, DIC .... 3-49Vehicle Data Recording and

Privacy ............................ 7-14

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) ................... 5-74Service Parts Identification

Label ........................... 5-74Ventilation Adjustment ........... 3-22Visors ................................. 2-10

WWarning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators ........................ 3-22Warnings

DIC Warnings andMessages .................... 3-42

Hazard Warning Flashers .... 3-5Safety and Symbols .............. iii

Washer Fluid, Low WarningLight ............................... 3-34

WheelsAlignment and Tire

Balance ....................... 5-55Different Size ................... 5-53Replacement .................... 5-55

Where to Put the Restraint .... 1-29Windows .............................. 2-9

Power ............................... 2-9Windshield

Rainsense™ II Wipers ......... 3-8Washer ............................. 3-8Washer Fluid .................... 5-24Wiper Blade

Replacement ................ 5-38Wiper Blades, Cleaning ..... 5-71Wiper Fuses .................... 5-75Wipers .............................. 3-7

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ............................... 3-9

Winter Driving ...................... 4-15Wiper Activated Headlamps ... 3-12

INDEX i-11

XXM Radio Messages ............ 3-71XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System ........................... 3-84

YYour Driving, the Road and

Your Vehicle ...................... 4-1Your Vehicle and the

Environment ...................... 6-2

i-12 INDEX

2009 Saturn VUE Green Line Hybrid Owner Manual M

Documents